UC-NRLF SB 257 3bfi REESE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. Received ft , i goo , 1 Accession No. SC3(oS . Class No. 7 6Q I Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from Microsoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/elementarygrammaOOkennrich J- G X s. x • n in nr T3T M_ \ 0^, XKA> S 't^XL -£i \ \0j1~ •* U^4 -4>L^ > ail -0" JC ^^s aI> JJC e. ^UjJIm/ ®UJ *LA 0L»O» -^j JlX4 wiU x sO-k~* X* AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR LATIN LANGUAGE FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS BY BENJAMIN HALL KENNEDY, D.D. CANOX OF ELY NEW EDITION LONGMANS, GKEEN, AND CO. SQ PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON NEW YORK AND BOMBAY 1897 SC3 (o^ PREFACE (?97 THE THIRD EDITION. Tkb distinctive features of this Elementary Latin Grammar , as compared with that of Lilly, may be stated as follows. I. Accidence. — 1 . Quantity is briefly noticed in the first chapter, and the quantities of Latin words are marked throughout ; thus the learner is impressed with the importance of pronunciation, and prepared for the study of Prosody. 2. The Adjective is set down as a distinct part of speech, instead of the Participle. 3. The use of the Pronoun hie, hcec, hoc, in the declension of Nouns is dis- pensed with as unnecessary, — all that it is intended to teach being supplied by judicious Praxis. (See " the Child's Latin Primer.") 4. The term Conjunctive Mood is adopted from the best modern writers, its special uses (Potential, Subjunctive, &c.) being re- served for explanation in the Syntax. 5. The Participle, or Gerundive, in dus has been deprived of the name of Future, to which it certainly has no claim. 6. The Future Perfect in ro has been removed from the Conjunctive to its proper place in the In- dicative Mood. 7. The Tenses are translated by one sign only, the other English signs being afterwards specially noticed. In like manner, the varying forms, ere for erunt, re for ris, fui for sum, &c, are omitted in the paradigms, and specially noticed in a subsequent place. It is hoped that the paradigms have been made easier to the learner by these changes, and also by the synoptical form in which they are printed. 8 The old memorial hexameters for genders of Nouns, flexion of Verbs, &c, are replaced by rhyming Latin lines IV PREFACE. in octosyllabic rhythm, which are learnt (as the Author has found) with infinitely greater ease, remembered quite as well, and applied with at least equal readiness. In adopting this alteration, the Author has followed not only the dictates of his own judgment, but also the general practice of Continental School Grammars. II. Smaller Syntax and First Rides of Construing. — These rules are intended to introduce the beginner to the practice of construing simple sentences, before he enters upon the further study of Syntax. III. In the larger SyntaXj the Author has applied the improved principles of modern philology to the memorial system of instruc- tion. He has chosen Latin rules on account of their superior con- ciseness ; and, while he has made the individual rules short and clear enough for memorial citation, he has also adhered as nearly as he might to philosophical accuracy in their arrangement ; following the growth of the sentence from its simplest to its complex forms, and carefully explaining the distinction between the simple and compound sentence, as also between the several kinds of compound sentences. It is only by an accurate understanding of these dis- tinctions that a learner can thoroughly master the doctrine Of the Subjunctive mood, so eminently important in Latin ; and, how easily and perfectly it can be mastered by the method here adopted, the Author knows from long experience. By the Second Part of this Syntax (§§ 180 — 200) the Author is willing that the merits of this Grammar should be tested : it being remembered that boys are not supposed to study those rules until they are practically grounded in the Syntaxis Minor. It has not been thought neces- sary to append a translation of the higher Syntax. IV. The elementary rules of Prosody are thrown into the form of memorial Latin verses. This plan is appropriate to the subject itself, and suited to learners who have already made some progress in the language. Although it has been impossible in these verses to avoid occasional deviations from approved rhythm, yet, it will PREFACE. V be found that the objectionable lines do not form so much as one tenth part of the whole number ; while of verses decidedly inhar- monious chere are only 5 or 6 out of 225 ; and even these may be turned to advantage, as examples of what should be avoided in rhythm. The Author has never departed from the usual Grammatical Nomenclature, except for powerful reasons. In addition to the instances before mentioned, he wishes to draw the attention oi scholars to the great advantage of the term Copulative Verbs, as applied by him to the class of Verbs (sum, no, videor, vocor, &c), which couple a Subject and a Nominal Predicate. He is not aware that any collective term has heretofore been invented for them and the Syntax rules affecting them have been consequently vague and loose. In order to appropriate here the word Copulative, the Author has given to et, que, &c, the name of Sociative Conjunc- tions, and to aut, vel, &c, that of Dissociative : terms also better in themselves than Copulative and Disjunctive. LATm GRAMMAR. ACCIDENCE, OR WOKD-FORMATION* SIGNS OF SPEECH. § 1. Grammar teaches the rules of speech. Latin Grammar teaches the rules of the Latin speech, which was spoken by the ancient Romans. S 2. The Parts of Speech are Words : and the elements of Words are Letters. § 3. The Latin Letters are twenty-five, being the same as the English without W. Capitals : A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. Small : a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m. n, o, p, q, r s, t. u, v, x, y, z. § 4. Six of the Letters are Vocales, Vowels, self-sounding, a, e, i, o, u, y : the rest are Con son antes, Conso- nants, which cannot be sounded without a vowel. § .5. Consonants are divided into Liquids, Double Conso- nants, and Mutes. The Liquids are 1, m, n, r ; Double Coflaonanta, x, z $ the rest are Mutes. B % l ACCIDENCE, § 6. A Syllable consists of one or more letters pronounced in one breath ; as I-lex. A Diphthong is the sound of two voweh meeting in one syllable. There are three usual diphthongs, ae, oe, au; and three seldom used, ai, ei, eu. § 7. Every Syllable is considered short ( w ) or long ( " ) in quantity, according as its vowel is short or long. " Short by nature, . . as amor. Long by nature, . . as esu. A Vowel J Short by position before another may be vowel, ... as pios. Long by position before two con- sonants or a double consonant, as pernox. Obs. All diphthongs are long ; as caudse. § 8. Puncta, the Signs of Punctuation, or Stops, are the same in Latin as in English : Comma (,) ; Semicolon ( ; ) ; Colon (:) ; Full Stop (.) ; Note of Interrogation (?) , Note of Admiration (!). PARTS OF SPEECH. § 9. The Parts of Speech, or Words, are of three kinds : I. Nomina, Nouns ; which are threefold : (1) Nomina Substantia, Nouns Substantive, oi names of persons and things : as, Caesar,. Ccesar ; ovum, an egg ; virtus, virtue. (2) Nomina Adjectiva, Nouns Adjective; which express the qualities of persons and things, : as, clarus, illustrious ; grandis, large ; liber, , free. (3) Puonomina, Pronouns \ which are used to avoid OR WORD-FORMATION. 3 the frequent repetition of Substantives : as, egtf, /; tu, thou ; Ille, he ; qui, who. Nets, Names of persons and places are called Proper Names : other Substantives are called Common Nouns, or Appel latives. EL Verba, Verbs ; which express what persons and things do, suffer, or are : as, Ceesar venit, Cce- sar comes; virtus laudatur, virtue is praised * ovum est grande, the egg is large. III. Particul2E, Particles ; which are four-fold : (1.) Adverbia, Adverbs ; which express the quali- ties of verbs or adjectives : as, bene, well ; celeriter, quickly ; nunc, now. (2) Pr/EPOSitiones, Prepositions ; which express the relations of nouns to each other : as, Caesar in Italiam venit, Caesar comes into Italy. (3) Conjunctions s, Conjunctions ; which connect the other parts of speech : as, ego et Caesar, /and Ccesar ; venit ut laudettir, he comes that he may be praised. (4) Intertectiones, Interjections ; words of excla- mation : as, heu, eheu, hei, vse, alas ! heus, ho ! 0, oh I en, ecce, lo ! § 10. Therefore the Parts of Speech are Eight ; viz. 1. Substantive; 2. Adjective; 3. Pronoun ; 4. Verb ; which are Flexibilia, Flexible, or, declined. 5. Adverb ; 6. Preposition ; 7. Conjunction ; 8. Interjection; which are Inflexibilia, In- flexible, or, undeclined. Note. Flexio, Flexion, is the manner of changing the endings of words in order to show their relations to other words. The flexion of Nouns is called Declinatio, Declension; the flexion of Verbs Conjugatlo, Conjugation. 1 ACCIDENCE, DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. Jll. The Substantive is declined by Number and Case. Numeri, the Numbers, are two : I. Singularis, Singular, which speaks of one, a3, Magist&j a master, II. Pluralis, Plural, which speaks of more than one, as, Magistrl, masters. Casus, the Cases, are six : L Nommativus, the Nominative (or Subject) Case, usu ally goes before a Verb, and answers the question Who, or What ? as, Who teaches ? Magister docet, the master teaches. II. Genitiviis, the Genitive Case, has the sign of, and an- swers the question, Whose, or Whereof ? as, Whose voice ? Magistrl vox, the voice of the master. III. Datlvus, the Dative Case, has the signs to, for, and answers the question, To or for Whom? To or for What ? as, To whom do I speak ? Loquor magls- tro, / speak to the master. TV. Accusatlvus, the Accusative (or Object) Case, follows the Verb, and answers the question, Whom or What? as, Whom do I see? Video maglstrum, I see the master. It also follows Prepositions. V. Vocatlviis, the Vocative Case, is of one called or spoken to : as, O magister ! master ! VL Ablatlvus, the Ablative Case, has the signs by, with, from, in, and others, and often follows Prepositions : as, By whom am I taught ? DSceor a magistro, / am taught by the master. OR WORD-FORMATION. § 12. There are Five Declensions of Latin Substantives, known by the endings of the Genitive Case Singular. The Genitive Singular of the 1st Declension ends in ) Plural a. 1. Sing Nom. Opus, a work Gen. OpeV-is, of a work Dat. Oper-I, to or for a work Ace. Op- us, a work Voc. Op- iis, work A bl. Oper-e, by, with, or from a work. Oper-ibtis, by, with, or from work*. Phr. OpSr-a, works Oper-um, of works Oper-ibtis, to or for ivorks Oper-a, works Oper-a, works 2. Nom. Fulmen, lightning Gen. Fulmin-is, of lightning Dat. Fulmin-I, to or for lightning Ace. FulmSn, lightning Voc. Fulmen, lightning A bl. Ful min-e, &y, wiYA, or from light- ning. Fiilmin-a, lightnings Fulmin-um, of lightnings Fulmin-ibtis, to or for lightnings Fulmin-a, lightnings Fulmin-a, lightnings Fulmin-ibtis, by, with, or from lightnings. FOURTH DECLENSION. § 19. The Nominative of Masculine and Feminine Substan- tives of the Fourth Declension ends in us ; that of Neuter Substantives in u. l. Sing. Nom. Grad-iis, a step Gen. Grad-iis, of a step Dat. Grad-ijj, to or for a step Ace. Grad-um, a step Voc. Grad-iis, O step Abl. Grad-ii, by, with, or from a step. Plu? I Grad-iis, steps Grad-iium, of steps Grad-ibiis, to or for step* I Grad-iis, steps I Grad-us, steps I Grad-ibiis, by, with, or from steps Nom. Gen-u, a knee G&n-ua, knees Gen. GSn-iis, of a knee Gfin-uum, of knees Dat. Gen-u, to or for a knee Gen-ibiis, to or for knee* Ace. GSn-u, a knee Gen-ua, knees Voc. GSn-ii, knee Gen-ua, knees Abl, Gen-ii, by, with, or from a knee. Gen-ibiis, by, with, or from hires. OR WORD-FOltMATION. 13 Obs. 1 . The following words take tibas instead of ibus in the Dative and Ablative Plural : Arciis, tribus, artus, Querctis, aciis, Speeds, portiis, partus, Veru, lacus. Obs. 2. Domus is peculiarly declined. See Notes. FIFTH DECLENSION". § 20. The Nominative ends in es> Sing. Flur. Nom. Faci-es, a face Fact- es, face* Gen. Faci-ei, of a face Facl-erum, effaces Dat. Faci-ei, to or for a face. Faci-ebus, to or for faces Ace. Fad-em, a face Fact- es, /aces Voc, Faci-es, face Faci-es, faces Abl. Faci-e, by, with, or from a face Faci-ebiis, by, with, or from faces. ON SOME CASES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION §21. Im pro em Accusativo, / pro e in Ablativo Dant buris, ciicumis, dmussis, Ravis, sitis, vis, et tussis ; Et flumina quse claudit is, Ut Albis, Litis, Tiberis. Im vel em Accusativo, /vel e in Ablativ5 [clams, Dant neptis, febris, messis, Puppis, pelvis, restis, navis, Securis, turris ; adde his Sementis atque strigilis. §22. / Slngiilaris Ablativi, la Pluralis Nominatlvi Neutra gaudent flngere, Quae exeunt in al f ar, e. His excepta sunt in ar, Baccar, nectar, jubdr, far. §23. Ium pr5 um quae efferunt Plural! Genitivo sunt : (1) /formantia Ablativo- (2) Non crescentia Genitivo : (3) Pleraque in x vel s Post consonantem positis : (4) Cum aliis Monosyllabls : Mas, mus, nix, nox, d.i (ossis), cos, Sal, sol, cor, pax, glis lis, et dos. His excipienda sunt (Quee um libenter efferunt), Vates, senex, pater, panis % Et accipiter, et cdnis, Frater, mater, juvenis, Et ssepitis apis, voliicris J4 ACCIDENCE, DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. ^ 24. A. Adjectives of Three Terminations in us, a, um^ or er, a, um, are declined in the Masculine ana Neuter Genders like Substantives of the Second Declension, and in the Feminine Gender like Substantives of the First Declension : as, bonus, good; niger, black; tener, tender. Singular. M. F. N. N. Bon-us bon-a bon-ura G. Bon-I bon-se bon-I D. Bon-o bon-ee bono A. Bon-um bon-am bon-um V. B6n-e bon-a bon-um A. Bon-o bon-a bon-o N. Nlg-Sr nigr-a nigr-um G. Nigr-I nigr-se nigr-I D. Nigr-o nigr-ae nigr-o A. Nigr-um nigr-am nigr-um V. Nlg~Sr nigr-a nigr-um A. Nigr-o nigr-a nigr-o N. Tener te'ne'r-a tener-um G. Tener- j ten^r-se tener-I D. Tener-o tener-a? tener-o A. Tener-um tenSr-am tener-um V. TenSr t^ner-a tener-um A. Tener-o tener-a tener-o Plural M. F. N. Bon-I bon-se bon-a Bon-orum bon-arum bon-orum Bon-Is bon-Is bon-ls Bon-os bon-as bon-a Bon-I bon-a? bon-a Bon-Is bon-Is bon-Is nigr-ae mgr-a nigr-arum nigr-orum nigr-is nigr-is nigr-as nigr-a nigr-se nigr-a nigr-is nigr-is Nigr-I Nigr-o rum Nigr-is Nigr-os Nigri Nigr-is Tener-i tener-a? tener-a Tener-orum tener-arumteuer-oruui Tener-Is tener-Is tener-is Tener-os tener-as tSner-a Tener-I tener- se tener-a Tener-is tener-Is tener-Is Obs. The Adjectives declined like tener are, asper, lacer, liber, misSi, prosper, and the compounds of fero and gero, as aurifer, beliiger. Dexter is declined both ways. § 25. B. Adjectives with Two Terminations or One Ter- mination follow the Third Declension of Sub- stantives : as, tristis, sad ; felix, happy ; Ingens, huge; melior, better. Singular. M.F. N. M.F. N. M.F. N. N. Trlst-ls trist-S Fel-Ix Ingens G. Trist-ts Fellc-Is Ingent-Is D. Trist-I Fellc-i Ingent-1 A. Trist-em trist-e' Felic-em fel-ix Ingent-em Ingens V. Trist-ts trist-e' Fel-lx Ingens A.. Trlst-I Fellc-I Ingent-1 or £ , OR WORD-FORMATION. 15 Plural K. Trist-es trist-la Felic-es felic-m Ingent-es mgent-ia G, Trlst-ium Felic-ium Ingent-ium D. Trist-ibus Felic-ibus Ingent-ibus A. Trist-es trist-ia Felic-es felic-ia Ingent-es Ingent-lS V, Trist-es trist-ia Felic-es felic-ia Ingent-es ingent-la A. Trist-lbus Felic-ibus Ingent-ibus Singular. Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. Norn. Mell-or melt- us Melior-es mglior-X Gen. Meltor-ls Mellor-um Dat. Melior-i Mehor-ibus Ace. Melior-em meli-us Mellor-es melior-a Voc. Meli-or mell-iis Melior-es melior-a Abl. Melior-e' or I Mellor-ibus Obs Adjectives in er, following the Third Declension of Substantives* have Three Terminations in the Nom. Sing. : as, acer, acr-is, acr-e, sharp ; celer, celer-is, ce'le'r-S, swift. Sing. r Sing. M F. N. M. F. N. Nom. Acer acr-is acr-S Celer celer-is celer 8 Gen. Acr-is acr-is acr-is Celer-is celer-is celer-is Dat. Acr-I acr-i acr-i Celer-I celer-i celer-I Ace. Acr-em acr-em acr-S Celer-em celer-em celer-d Voc. Acer acr-is acr-e Celer celer-is celer-e Abl. Acr-I acr-I acr-I Cele'r-I celer-I celSr-I The Plural terminations are like those of tristis; except cele'rum. Geni- tive Plural of celer. § 26. The following are irregularly declined in the Singular Unus, one. Uter, which of two. M. F. N. M. F. N. Nom. Un-tis iin-a iin-um Ut-er utr-a utr-um Gen. Un-ius Utr-ifis Dat. Un-I Utr-I Ace. Un-ura iin-am iin-um Utr-um utr-am utr-um Abl. Un-o un-a iin-o Utr-o utr-a utr-o Alius, another. Alter, one of two. Nom. Ali-iis all-a ali-tid Alter alter-a alter-um Gen. Al-Iiis Alter-iiis Dat. All -I Alter-! Ace. Ali-um all-am all-ud AlteV-um alter-am alte-rum Abl. All-o all-a al-io Alter-6 alter-a alter-o Ob*. Like unus are declined ullus, any ; nulliis, none ; soliis, alone f totiis, whole. Like titer: neuter, neither ; uterquS, each ; iiter- vis, uterlibet, which you wilL 16 ACCIDENCE, COMPARISON. $ 27. The Adjective is compared by three Degrees , the Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative : as, Pos. Comp. Sup. Duriis, hard; durior, harder; durissimus, hardest ; The Comparative is formed from the Positive by changing i or is of the Genitive into ior. The Superlative is formed from the Positive by changing i or is of the Genitive into issimus ; as, Pos. Comp. Sup. Durus, hard, Gen. dur-i • dur-ior dur-Issimiis Brevis, short. " brev-is brev-ior brev-issimus Audax, bold, " audac-is audac-ior audac-Issimus § 28. EXCEPTIONS. O) Adjectives in erform the Superlative by adding -rimus to the Nominative : as, pulcher, beautiful, Comp. piilchr-ior, Sup. pulcher-rimus ; celer, swift, cele- rior, cSlerrimus. So vetiis, ancient, (Gen. veteris,) Sup. veterrimus. (2) The following form the Superlative in lllimus : facilis, dlfficilis, similis, dissimilis, gracilis, et humllis. (3) Adjectives in dictis, f icus, volus, form their Compa- ratives and Superlatives as if from Positives in dicens, f icens, volens : as, in&ledicus, slanderous, maledicentior, maledicentlssimus, beneficus, beneficent, beneficentior, bfeneficentlssimus, benevolus, benevolent, benevolentior, benevolentissimtis. (4) If the Positive has a vowel before us, the Comparative and Superlative are formed by prefixing the Ad- verbs magis, more, maxime, most, to the Positive : as, ardii-us, steep ; magis arduus, more steep ; maxime arduus, most steep. But those in quus are compared as usual : as, antlquus, ancient, antiquior, antiquissimiis. So strenutis, vigorous, forms Sup. strenuissimus ; pius, pious, pilssimtis. OK WOUD-FORMATION. §29. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. Pos. Comp. Sup. Bonus, good mellor optimus Mai us, \ad pejor pessimus Magnus, great major maximus Parvus, small minor minim iis Mult us, much plus plurimus Nequam, wicked nequior nequisslmus Dives, rich divltior or ditlor cTivltisslmus or dit7sg*mu Senex, old senior (natu maximus) Jfivenls, young junior (natu minimus) Exteriis, outward exterior extremtis and extlmita Ini'eriis, low inferior Infimus and Imus Superus, high superior supremus and summiis Postertis, hindward posterior postremus and postiimtis. Comparatives and Superlatives formed from Prepositions. Pos. Comp. Sup. (Citra, this side of) clterlor ct^miis (Intra, within) Interior liuimus (Ultra, beyond) ulterior ultlmus (Pra?, before) prior primus (Propfi, near) proplor proximus. Comparatives and Superlatives formed without a Positive. Comp. Sup. Comp. Sup. Deterlor, worse deterrlmus Ocior, swifter ocissimtis Potior, more desirable potlsslmus Vbs. Many Adjectives are not compared at all; others have no Comparative ; some no Superlative. § 30. Adverbs derived from Adjectives are compared in us and e : as, (Dlgniis, worthy,) digne, worthily, dignius, dlgnissime. ( Gravis, weighty) graviter, weightily, graviiis, gravlssime. Ln the same manner, — S&pe, often, syepius, ssepissime. Dm, long, diutiias, diOtissime. Penitus, deeply, penitius, penitissime. Magis, more, maxime ; detenus, worse, deterrime ; potius, rather, potissimum; ociiis, more quickly, ocis- sime ; priiis, sooner, prlmum ; have no Positive. Belie, prettily, bellissime ; merito, deservedly, meritls- slme ; nuper, lately, nuperrime ; have no Compa- rative. Satis, enough, satms ; secus, differently, secl&s ; have no Suoeriative. c 18 ACCIDENCB, ill si? B S 9 •» < SPtl 1 1 5 « 2« e« tr* S . q l*LJ )« icu 5 25 OS cr b«'l Crt . 03 ' g4J 10) ,£ §3 IO £ >3 >0 >0) s t3 io) »S J2 ,fe » .98 *8 '> ,2 o >o> o ,5 2 .^ ,8 io) > J ><» ^3 3 -2 S * « "V ifi i8 -3 O "3 itf ,3 i2 tf Jff *d >5 S3'* aS^S P*3 a w i3 ~0 +j ca^M >o» £3 >r* •8 ritf •S'2, *» >-> i^ ,_ im a — 5 © «-. a '^ 9 3 '3 ^ •2 '-2 'a '5 iS '53 ,~ '3 H3 i-: 1 w 2- ELil '« .« '2 12 aSii l •*» C* C* x 1«, ( >fl a to) > 1.3 to 101 ■a a u 10) '(fl 152 0) 10) d "8 10) 10 -c 3 10 a -a 13 -d *S of i 5 T3 13 > V T3 IP 2 U* * ■ £ • ■ S S>i 5 e >3 £.3 5 tf! >3 to «/; >3 >a a, 6* 0- £ 14 a >3 '5 x cr CT tn 03 'O 2,- 5 y a >o) >-« S 5« >3 5 >i> >o> >- -d 3 ,3 -.3 S >3 -JS M ^ >3 '> w » p s * jg 5 g a s "S •> )3 a >a» "O 2 tl a > 3 >- na 10) a »3 'd >o O irt ,3 £ -g >o t3 ic >a> a >a ,§j 3 3 ,g ,g->3 3 !:-cs '« * £ -s < 3 « < OJ ^ |5 2S cc o *Vo !x» >3 >0 8 >3 i3 T3 JO >3 S S .S h e?-2 S 3 TJ S : a c u, .3 .3 'Ti Bio o S S '3 >S 3 1 2g K E w) n 'a ii i >o> bJOii ,S* o >0 >0) 8 >3 } S 10 a *d is -o • 3 a '> ,3° ,3 g id '> a « id -a 10) 3D.- fn •a) w 8 ■8 to) ,3 '^a '> i3 T3 13 . X^ X OR WORD-FORMATION 19 03 IV IV v* ■© -^ a i 2 oS 3 ■« : £"fcC>; 4 1.. 'V ^ 101 05 03 "5* ** Cr, to o iv id) a G ,§Pi«r«2 -c Q i» 'g 1 'I S •§ «S =g 'S ■ O G i3 « v "d +3 : G- >rj IV G *j S >-H bO»9> G ai S 3 c fcJDio) id '2 o" Q o tJO,s R c C 1 C « ui >0 G £3 | G O ?2 q g 3 >v cr « !T"T3 >« *?>,- •§ ,- »s II Fi is 1111 tf I til c * as 10 g i3 6 o tJ 13 ccra »io G bD*S . c 5 C«2 ho? 7= G a 3 >g I i e!§ i '3 >v . g a 2 >3^ 03 ST Wi >3 be •3 X T 1 r« B.,3 >3 3 1 ,1 1 1 •! fa/3 U 03 03 — a ' I* w !2 'S iv i3 *» •2 s >3 « a Cf. S w ns 5 5 ■m id ^ >3 " a J S P <« '© 03 >3 3= ■ ill G '«« >3 10) — ill G 2 10) - bJC SSI 3?^ c"8 53 ,5 £P^ i B M 0,*3 c- g . : a ' cr 03 «s io c 't/Dirt 5 us '5 5 3 2 w ,a> ^ c 10 G ,§ ,§ >3 >£ ci3 o o-o 5 a* a* 3 ia) i~ c : bc>o> •f= SB gun uaginta Ti millia enta mil centum KB 5 §-s 2" 3 £Pt$ G 0) 3 *j 3 ,^ 3 >a> 3 IV 3 >S CT-O C 0) 0~"T3 ^X UU 3 Q U O i. hh 9 M » Q OOOOOOiQ — QQQQQOOOOOO u; 50t-»CiCiOOOOOOOOOOOOQ '2§88! i 1 ►f . £ iv m » "5.5 o- •O S t G » J w X ^ .. IO) s •• 1*8 ■ ^ a CV. CU 03 •2 i&'H, C- u 3 3 i2 ♦» 9 r ' 2 a sj 3 •rj » 03 1 s s V "" 3 V P*.G G G-.S S» O w _ g^ 02 g «^ 2 -3 B X ^ o © S'3 o^'S 2 £• h 03" >^ e- 5 =5 >3 G 5 ,5 2 «P 5 = 2 5 © -•^ &d «e P *» 2 •• & *5 2C > ACCIDENCE, § 32. Duo, two , Tres, three, and Millia. thousands. Plural Plural. Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. N. N. Dtio dine duo Tres tri* . . Millia G. Diiorum duarum duorum Trlum MI 11mm D. Diiobus duabtis duobtis Tribiis Millibus A. Duos diias dtio Tres tri& Millia A. Diiobus duabus diiobus Tribiis Millibus Note 1. Ambo, both, is declined like Duo. Note 2. The other Cardinal Numbers, from quattiior to centum, are undeclined. MillS is also an undeclined Adjective. DECLENSION OF PEONOUNS. § 33. Pronomina, Pronouns, are A. Personalia, Personal Pronouns : ego, /; tu, thou ; sin, himself, herself, or themselves. B. Possessiva, Possessive Pronouns, which are derived from the Genitives of the Personal Pronouns : as, metis, my, mine; tiius, thy, thine; suus, his, her, or their own ; ndster, our ; vester, your. C. Demonstrativa, Demonstrative Pronouns : hie, this ; llle, Istg, that ; and Determinativa : is, that; ipse, self; idem, the same. T). Relativtjm, the Relative Pronoun qui. who or ivhich ; Interrogativum, the Interrogative, quis, qui, who or wkatt and their compounds. 34. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Abl. A. PERSONALIA. 1 . — Pronoun of 1st Persoa. Plur. Nos, we Nostri and nostrum, of us Nobis, to or for us Nos, us Nobis, by, with, or from us. 2. — Pronoun of 2d Person. Sing. Plur. Tii, thou Vos, ye Tul, of thee Vestrl and vgstrum, of you Tibi, to or for thee Vobis, to or for you Te, thee . Vos, you Te, by, with, ox from thee. I Vobis, by, with, or from you Sing. Ego,/ Mei, of me Ml hi, to or for me Me, me Me, by, with, or from me. OR WORD- FORMATION. 21 Obs 3. — Pronoun of 3d Person. Sing, and Plur. Nom. (wanting) jjren. Sfil, of himself, herself or themselves Dat. Sibi, to or for himself herself or themselves Ace. Se or sese, himself herself or themselves Abl. Se or sese, fry himself herself or themselves. These Pronouns sometimes take tne syllable met : as, egomSt, 1 myself ; vosmSt, ye yourselves ; sibime't, to himself I 35. B. POSSESSIVA. Metis, mea, meum ; tiiiis, tua, tiium ; suiis, sua, suum ; like bonus, § 24 Noster, nostra, nostrum ; vester, vestra, vestrum; like nigSr, § 24. Obs. 1. Metis, Voc. Masc. mi. lbs. 2. Gentilia Possessiva : nostr-as, -atfs, of our country ; vestr-a> -arts, of your country ; cuj-as, -atis, of what country ? Obs. 3. The Possessive Relative, cujiis, cuja, ciijum, whose? § 36. C. DEMONSTRATIVA et DETERMEN' A 1 IV A. Sing. Sing. Sing. N Hie hsec hoc Ille* ilia Illud Is ea id G. Hujiis Illius Ejus I). Hulc nii EI A. Hfmc hanc hoc Ilium Illam mad Eum earn Id A. Hoc hac Plur. hoc 1115 ilia Plur. Illo Eo ea Plur. eo N HI ha? haec iui Ills ilia II eee ea G. Horum harumhorum Illorum lllarum Illorum Eorum earum eorui/ D. His mis lis or els A. Hos has hsec lllos Illas Ilia Eos eas ea A. His mis lis or els Sing. Nom. Idem eadem idem Gen. Ejusdem Dat. Eldem Ace. Eiindem tandem idem Abl. Eodem eadem eodem Plur. Ildem eadem gadem Eorundem earundem eoriindem Ilsdem or elsdem Eosdem easdem eadem Ilsdem or elsdem Obs. Ist6 is declined like Ille ; Ipse like Ille, but with Neut. S. Ipsum §37. D. RELATIYUM. Sing. Plur. Nom. Qui quae quod Qui qua? qua Gen. Cujiis Quorum quarum quorum Dat. Cui Quibtis or quels Ace. Quern quaro quod Quos quas qure Abl Quo qua qi»5 ► Qui bus or quels 22 ACCIDENCE, The following are mostly declined like Qui. H) Quts, quid, and Qui, quse, quod; G. cujus, &c. ; who or whatt (Interrogative.) (2) Quis, qua, quid, any one. (Indefinite.) Qui is also used indefinitely. (3) Quidam, quaklam, quoddam or qulddam ; G, cujusdam ; D. cuidam; Ace. quendam, quandam, quoddam, &c. ; a certain one. (4) QuivTs, quaWIs, quodvls or quidvis ; G. cujusvis ; any one. (5) Quilibet, quaelihet, quodlibet or quIdllbSt ; G. cujuslibe't ; any one (6) Quicunque, quieeunque, quodcunque' ; G. cujusciinque ; who or whatsoever. (7) Qulsnam, quid nam, and quinam, qusenam, quodnam ; G.cujusnam; who or what ? (8) Quisquls, Neut. quidquid ; Abl. quoquo ; who or whatsoever. (9) Quisque, quseque, quodque or quidque, each. (10) Quisquam [qiuequam], quidquam, any one. Plural wanting. (11) Quisplam, quzepiam, quldpiam, any one. (12) Aliquls, allqua, aliquld, and aliqui, aliqua?, aliquod, some one. (13) Ecquis, ecqua, ecquid, and ecqul, ecquaj, ecquod, any one 9 (14) UnusquisquS, unaqua?que, uniimquodque or unumquldqufc ; Q. iiniuscuj usque ; each one. THE VEEB. 88. Verbs have Two Voices (Voces) : (1) Vox Activa, the Active (or Doing) Voice : as, amo, I love. (2) Vox Passiva, the Passive (or Suffering) Voice : as, amor, I am loved. Verbs of the Active Voice are either (1) Transitiva, acting on an object : as, amo Deum, Hove God: or, (2) Intransitiva, vel Neutra, expressing a state : as, sto, I stand. Obs. Neuter Verbs Active have no Passive Voice, except as Impersonal s in the Third Persons Singular. Deponentia, Deponent Verbs, though conjugated in the Passive Voice chiefly, lay aside (depouunt) the Passive, and take an Active signification: some being Transitive ; as, hortor, / exhort ; some Neuter ; as, morior, / die. OH WORD-FORMATION. § 39. Verbs have Three proper Moods (Modi) : 23 Modus 4 (1) Indicatives, Indicative, for unconditional action : as, amo, / love, (2) Conjunctives. Conjunctive, for condi. tional action : as, amem, / may love. (3) Lviperativus, Imperative, for command or entreaty : as, ama, love thou. Ok*. The Conjunctive Mood in some of its uses is called Sub- junctive, in some Potential. Vorbs have also : (1) Infinitivus, an Infinitive (improper) Mood, ex- pressing the action of the Verb without re- lations of Person : as, amare, to love, amavissS, to have loved. (2) Gerund i a, Gerunds; Three in number : 1 (a) ftmandi, of loving, O m (b) amando, for or by loving, (c) amandum, the loving ; (3) Supina, Supines ; Two in number : (a) amatum, to love, (b) amatu, to be loved ; 4) Participia, Participles ; Two for each Voice : as, » . f Present Part., amans, loving, \ Future Part., amaturus, about to love. p € . f Past Part., amatus. loved, \ Part., in dim amandus, meet to beloved. Ndte. Participles are so called, because they take part ot the properties of Verbs, as Tense and Transitive Power, and part of the properties of Adjectives, as Case and Gender. Thus they are the Ad- jectives of the Verb, as the Infinitive (with the Gerunds and Supines) forms its Substantive. § 40. Verbs have Six Tenses (Ternpora); Three for unfi- nished action, Three for finished action 24 ACCIDENCE, Unfinished Action. (1) Prjesens, Present; as, amo, I love, or am loving. (2) Prjeteritum Imperfectum, Preterirnperfect : as, amabam, / was loving. (3) Futurum Imperfectum, vel Simplex, Future Imperfect or Simple : as, amabo, / shall love, or shall be loving. Finished Action. (1) Prveteritum Perfectum, Preterperfect : as, amavl, 7 loved, or have loved. (2) Pr^eteritum Plusquamperfectum, Preterpluperfect : as, amave'ram, I had loved. (8) Futurum Perfectum vel Ex actum. Future Perfect or Exact : as, amavero, / shall have loved. § 41. Verbs are conjugated also by Two Numbers, Singulai and Plural ; and by Three Persons in each Number : The First expressing the Person! „ w „ _ , , - vr.«s«l*« „,', io t> u ^ t ego amo, / love, nos amamus, we love. or Persons who speak : as, J ° The Second expressing the PerO son or Persons to whom one L tu amas, thou lovest, vos amatis, ye lovu speaks : as, - - J The Third expressing that of | _ 11v ^ Vl » , -n- * - A \.i 7 , . , 1 t die amat, Ae Zoue*, ah amant, Mey lovt which one speaks : as, w CONJUGATION OF VERBS. § 42. There are Four Conjugations of Latin Verbs. L The First Conjugation is known by a before re : as, amare, h5rtare. II. The Second Conjugation is known by e before re : as, mSnere, v&rere. III. The Third Conjugation is known by e before re: as, regere, loquere. IV. The Fourth Conjugation is known by i before re: as, aiidire, partlre. § 43. In order to conjugate a Latin Verb, it is necessary to know : (1) The Present Indie. Act. 1st Person ; (2) The Preterperfect Indie. Act. 1st Person ; (3) The Infinitive Pres. Act. ; (4) The Supine in urn. For from these the other Tenses may be derived. OR WORD- FORMATION 2.5 § 44. It is useful for the learner, when conjugating a Verb* to mention also the 2d Person Sing. Pres. Indie. Act., the Gerunds, Supines, and Participles. He will therefore conjugate the Verbs as follows : — ACTIVE VOICE. 1st Conj. 2d Conj. 1 3d Conj. 4th Conu Pres. Ind. lit Pers. am-o mon-eo reg-o aud-io „ 2d Pers. am- as mon-es reg-Is aud-is Preterperfect am-avi mon-ui rex-I aud-ivi Infinitive am- are mon-ere reg-ere aud-Ire Gerund in di am-andl mon-endl reg-endl aud-iendi „ do am-ando mon-endo reg-endo aud-^endo „ dura am-andum mon-endum reg-endum aud-Iendura Supine in urn am-atum mon-itum rect-um aud-itum „ u am-atu mon-itu rect-ii aud-itu Participle Present ara-ans mon-ens reg-ens aud-lens „ Future am-aturiis mon-iturtis ^rect-urtis aud-Iturtis PASS IVE VOICE. Is* Conj. 2c? Conj. 1 3d Conj. 4th Conj. Pres. Tnd. 1st Pers. am-or mon-e'or reg-or aud-ior „ 2d Pers. am-aris mon-eris |reg-eris aud-Irls Preterperfect iSm-atus sum mon-itiis sum rect-iis sum aud-itiis sum Infinitive am-ari mon-erl reg-I aud-iri Participle Perfect am-atiis mon-lttis rect-us aud-itiis „ in dus am- and us mon-endtis reg-exidus aud-iendus EXAMPLES F< OR CONJUGATION. 1st Conj., like am-o. 2d Conj., like mon-eo. ar-6, I plough hab-eo, I have cert-o, / contend deb-eo, I owe clam -o, / cry out terr-eo, I frighten ciir-o, / regard prohib-eo, I forbid opt-o, I wish exerc-eo, I exercise piign-o, I fight praeb-eo, I afford nomln-o, / name adhib-eo, I apply iedlfic-o, I build. cohib-eo, I restrain. '3d Conj., like reg-o. 4th Conj., like aud-io. teg-o, I cover fm-io, lend sug-o, / suck pun-io, I punish jung-o, I join mun-io, /fortify cing-o, I gird nutr-to, / nourish dic-o, I say vest-io, / clothe diic-o, Head custod-io, I guard vgh-o, I carry Imp?d-lo, I hinder coqu-o, j 1 cook € iud-io, Tins truct. 36 § 50. ACCIDENCE, THE THIRD ACTIVE Indicative Mood. S. Reg-o, I rule, rSg-is, thou rulest reg-lt, he rules PL reg-lmus, we rule reg-itls, ye rule reg-unt, they rule S. reg-ebam, I was reg-ebas, thou wast reg-ebat, he was PL reg-ebam iis, we were reg-ebatis, ye were reg-ebant, they were S. rex-I, I ruled rex-isti, thou ruledst rex-it, he ruled PI. rex-imus, we ruled rex-istis, ye ruled rex-erunt, they ruled. Conjunctive Mood. reg-am, I may reg-as. thou mayst reg-at, he may reg-amus, we may reg-at is, ye may reg-ant, they may reg-erem, / might reg-eres, thou mightst reg-eret, he might reg-erem iis, we might reg-eret is, ye might reg-erent, they might rex-erim, I may rex-eris, thou mayst rex-erit, he may rex-erimus, we may rex-eritis, ye may rex-erint, they may S. rex-Sram, I had rex -eras, thou hadst rex-Srat, he had PL rex-gramus, we had rex-Sratis, ye had rex-erant, they had rex-issem, I would rex-isses, thou wouldst rex-Tsset, he would rex-issemiis, we would rex-issetls, ye would rex-Issent, they would S. r2g-am, I shall rSg-es, thou shalt reg-St, he shall 1^ PI. reg-emiis, we shall \ ^ reg-etis, ye shall reg-ent, they shall rect-urtis sim, / may rect-urus sis, thou mayst rect-urtis sit, he may rect-uri si m iis, we may rect-uri sitis, ye may rect-im sint, they may & PL rex-Sro, I shall rex-eris, thou shalt rex-erit, he shall rex-erimtis, we shall rex-eVitis, ye shall rex-grint, they shall f reg-endl, of ruling Utrunds. < reg-end5, for or by ruling [ rSg-endum, tne ruling OR WORD-FORMATION. 37 CONJUGATION. VOICE. Imperative Mood. Infinitive Mood. Participles. reg-e, r£g-lto, rule thou reg-ito, let him rule reg-itS, rtfgltote, rule ye reg-unto, let them rule rSg-grg, to rule, or be ruling. rSg-ens, ruling. ( rex-isse, to have ruled. rect-umm essg, to be about to rule. rect-urtis, about to rule. ! Supines. < ect-um, to rule. ect-u, to be ruled. 23 ACCIDENCE, | 46. THE FIRST ACTTTB r i Indicative Mood. Conjunctive Mood. i & a H d 5 S. Am-o, I love am- as, thou lovest ~%^' am-at, he loves PL am-amus, we love am-atis, ye love am-ant, they love. am-em, r may am-es, thou mayst am-et, he may am- emus, we may am-et is, ye may am-ent, they may ■J 5 cs & J 5 o o a, S am-abam, / was am-abas, thnu wast am-abat, he was PL am-abam lis, we were am- abatis, ye were am-abant, they were ,5 am-arem, I might am-ares, thou mightst am-are't, he might am-arem us, we might am-aretis, ye might am-arent, they might •4 S. am-avl, I loved Sm-avisti, thou lovedst am-avl t, he loved PL am-avlmiis, we loved am-avl stls, ye loved am-averunt, they loved. am-averim, / may am-averis, thou mavst -£ am-averit, he may 1 § am-averim us, we may I « auri-averitls, ye may 3 am-averint, they may <£ o, a 'a, E P* J? 5 f B 3 1 S. am-aveVam, T had am-averas, thou hadst am-averat, he had PL am- ave ramus, we had am-averatis, ye had am-averant, they had _ B V' 5 „3 am-avissem, / would am-avlsses, thou wouldst am-avlssct, he would am-avissemiis, we would am-avissetis, ye would am-avlssent, they would b | S. am-abo, I shall am-abis, thou shalt am-abit, he shall PL &m-ablmus, we shall am-abitis, ye shall am-abunt, they shall j am-aturus sim, I may am-aturus sis, thou ntayst am-aturus sit, he may am-aturl slmus, we may am-atiiri sitis, ye may am-aturl slut, they may 5 •2 1 1 O 3 S. Sm-avero, I shall am-averis, thou shalt &m -ave lit, he shall Ft. am-averim us, we shall am-averitls, ye shall S,m- aver Int, they shall 8 "•-2 s 1 f am-andl, of loving Gerunds. < am-ando, jfor or 6y loving y am-andum, the loving. OR WORD- FORMATION. «9 CONJUGATION. VOICE. 1 Imperative Mood. 1 Infinitive Mood. Participles. am-a, am-ato, love thou am-ato, let him love am- atS, am-atote, love ye am-anto, let them love. am-arg, to love, or be loving. am-ans, loving. am-avlss£, to hate loved. am-atu rum ess£,fo be about to love. am-aturus, about to love. Supine,, f*™-^™''? 1 ™- r ^ am-atu, to be loved. 30 * 47. ACCIDENCE, THE FIRST PASSIVE Indicative Mood. Conjunctive Mood. i G S. Am-or, lam ^ am-er, 7 may * am-aris, thou art J am-eris, thou mayst *8 H am-atur, Ae is 1 •« am-etiir, he may c PL am-amur, we are f » am-emur, we may -2 - - v - 1-2 E am-amini, ye are am-emml, ye may «o £ am-antur, they are J am-entiir, they may 1 S. am-abar, I was am-arer, I might "j am-abaris, thou wast if am-areris, thou mightst 1 ,. am-aretur, he might 1 g 5. .§ am-abatiir, he icas PL am-abamur, we were g» am-aremiir, we might f-2 0) am-abamini, ye were 3 am-areminT, ye might 1 -o £ am-abantur, they were o am-arentiir, they might J & am-atiis sum, / was am-atiis sim, I may 1 Sm-atus es, thou wast am-atiis sis, thou mayst S S3 am-atiis est, he was ■« am-atus sit, he may JN 1 & OP PL am-ati sum us, we were am-ati simiis, we may * £ 1 £ Sm-ati estls, ye were ""* am-ati sltis, ye may £ am-ati sunt, they were am-ati sint, tliey may 'j S. am-atiis eram, I had -| am-atiis essem, I would I «2£ am-atiis eras, thou hadst "« am-atiis esses, thou wonldst 8 1 am-atiis erat, he had s> am-atiis esset, he would ►•S j "5. PL am-ati eramiis, we had **f am-ati essemiis, we would sj V am-ati eratts, ye had am-ati essetls, ye would & am-ati erant, they had - am-ati essent, they would ii i B S. am-abor, I shall am-aberis, thou shalt ll am-abitiir, he shall Pt. am-ablmiir, we shall f "§ u 2 am-ablmlni, ye shall 1 -o 1 am-abuntiir, they shall J 1 S. Sm-attis £ro, / shall am-atiis ens, thou shalt § £ am-atiis erlt, he shall it £ PL am-ati grimiis,tt;esAa7/ g| 9 am-ati eritis, ye shall ^ 1 am-atl &Tunt,they shall ' " ■ OR WORD-FORMATION. 31 CONJUGATION. VOICE. Imperative Mood. Infinitive Mood. Partieiphs. am-arg, am-ator, be thou am-ator, let him be am-amirii, &m- aminor, be am-antor, let them be am-arl, to be loved. am-atum esse, to have been loved. am -fit lis, loved. am-atum Irl, to be ahcvt to be loved. Sm-andfis, meet to be loved. UNIVFRQTTV 3? ACCIDENCE, § 48. THE SECOND ACTH E fivdicative Mood. S. Mon-eo, I advise mon-es, thou advisest mon-et, he advises PL mon-emus, we advise mon-etls, ye advise mon-ent, they advise. Conjunctive Mood. mon-eam, / may mon-eas, thou mayst i mon -eat, he may mon-eam us, we may i mon-eatls, ye irjiy mon-eant, they may j S. mon-ebam, / was mon-ebas, thou wast mon-ebat, he was PL mon-ebamfis, we were mon-ebat is, ye were mon-ebant, they were mdn-erem, / might mon-eres, thou mightst mon-eret, he might mon-eremus, we might mon-eretls, ye might mon-erent, they might _ S. mon-iii, / advised mon-uistl, iuou advisedst mon-irit, he advised PL mon-ulmus, we advised mon-ulstis, ye advised mon-uerunt, they advised. mou-uerim, / may mon-ueris, thou mayst mon-uerit, he may mon-uerimus, we m r mon -fieri tis, ye ma mon-uerint, they v.ay / ► § S. mon-fieram, I had mon-ueras, thou hadst mon-iierat, he had •§. j PL mon-ueramfis, we had mon-ueratls, ye had mon-uerant, they had j mon-fussem, / would mon-uisses, thou wouldst mon-uisset, he would mon-ulssemus, we wotdd mon uissetis, ye would mon-uissent, they would t PL mon- ebo, T shall mon-ebis, thou shalt mon-ebit, he shall mon-ebimiis, we. shall mon-ebltis, ye shall mon-ebunt, they shall _ mon-iturtis sim, I may mon-Iturus sis, thou mayst mon-iturus sit, he may mon-ituri slmus, we may mon-ituri sitts, ye may mon-ituri sint, they may 1 J S. mon-iiero, I shall mon-ueris, thou shalt mon- fieri t, he shall PI. mon-fierimus, we shall mon-ueritis, ye shall mon-iie'rlnt, they shall __ {mon-endl, of advising mon-endo, for or by advising mon-endum, the advising. OR WORD-FORMATION. 33 CONJUGATION. VOICE. Imperative Mood. Infinitive Mood. Participles. • 9 • • • mon»S, mon-eto, advise thou mon-eto, let him advise ■ mon-et§, mon-etote', advise ye j mon-ento, let them advise. mon-erS, to advise, or be advising. mon-Sns, advising \ 1 1 mon-ulssg, to have advised. t mon-iturum ess£, to he about to ad- vise. mon-lturiis, about to advise. r~ — Suptnes. < non-itum, to advise non-itu, to be advise d. 54 § 49. ACCIDENCE, THE SECOND PASSTVE Indicative Mood. S. Mon-Sor, lam mon-eris, thou art mon-etur, he is PL mon-emiir, we are mon-emini, ye are mon-entur, they are j S. mon-ebar, 1 was mon-ebarls, thou wast mon-ehatur, he was PL mon-eb.'imiir, we were mon-ebamlni, ye were mon-ebantiir, they were S. mon-itus sum, / was mo n- it us es, thou wast mon-itus est, he. was PL mon-iti stimiis, we were mon-iti estis, ye were mon-lti sunt, they were S. mon-itus eram, I had mon-ltiis eras, thou hadst mon-itus erat, he had PL mon-iti eram us, we had m6n-iti eratls, ye had non-lti erant, they had S. mon-ebur, / shall mon-eberls, thou shalt mon-ebltur, he shall PI. mon-ebimur, we shad mon-eblmini, ye shall mon-ebuntiir, they shall S. itton-Hus Sro, / shall "1 mon-ltiis &ris, thou shalt \ s .. mon-itus grit, he shall [& % PL mon- ill SrlmuSfWe shall f a -| mon-iti eYitis, ye shall 4: 3 mon-lti Srunt, they shall \ Conjunctive Mood. mon-ear, / may mon- earls, thou may est mon-eatiir, he may mon-eamur, we may mon-eaminl, ye may mon-eantiir, they may mon-erer, / might mon-ereris, thou mightst mon-eretiir, he might mon-eremur, we might uion-eremlni, ye might mon-erentiir, they might mon-itus sim, / may mon-ltiis sis, thou may si mon-itus sit, he may mon-lti simus, we may mon-iti sitls, ye may mon-lti sint, they may mon-itus essem, I would inon-itus t±sses,thouwouldst mon-itiis esset, be would mon-iti esscmus,M/'4 t rect-urus sim, / may reet-uriis sis, thou may^ rect-urtis sit, he may rect-urT simiis, we may rect-uri sitis, ye may rect-uri sint, they may J 1 B V 9 9 Ex S. rex-gro, I shall rex-eris, thou shalt rex-erit, he shall PL rex-erimiis, we shall rex-gritis, ye shall rex-Srint, they shall 1 8 f reg-endl, of ruling Gtrunds. < rgg-endo, for or by ruling (^reg-endum, tne ruling OR WORD-FORMATION. 37 CONJUGATION. VOICE. Imperative Mood, Infinitive Mood, reg-e, rgg-lto, rule thou reg-ito, let him rule reg-itg, rSgltote, rule ye reg-unto, let them rule r£g-£rg, to rule, or be ruling. rex-isse, to have ruled. Participles. r£g-ens, ruling. rect-urum essS, to be about to rule. rect-uriis, about to I rule. o . f rect-um, to rule, upines. | r g Ct _ G) tQ fo ru i ec i 9 38 § 51. ACCIDENCE, THE THIKD PASSIVE Indicative Mood. - Conjunctive Mood. 6 1 h c 9 S c S. Reg-or, /am reg-eris t thou art reg-lttir, he is PL reg-imur, we are reg-lminl, ye are reg-untiir, they are 3 reg-ar, / may reg-aris, thou mayst reg-atiir, he may reg-amiir, we may reg-aminl, ye may reg-antiir, they may ■d -Si ► s k • 1 E E 1 s & m S. reg-ebar, I was reg-ebaris, thou wast reg-ebatiir, he was PL reg-ebamur, we were reg-ebamini, ye were reg-ebantur, they wrre ■d > J reg-erer, / might reg-ereris, thou mightst reg-eretiir, he might reg-eremur, we might reg-eremini, ye might rgg-erentiir, they might "d <5 S. rect-us sum, I was ' rect-iis Ss, thou wast rect-iis est, he was PL rect-I siimus, we were rect-I estis, ye were rect-I sunt, they were •d rect-iis sim, / may "i rect-iis sis, thou mayst J « rect-us sit, he may 1 <> "5 rect-I slmiis, we may C » jj rect-I sltis, ye may 1 4» rect-I slnt, they may "5. S. rect-iis eram, / had rect-iis eras, thou hadst rect-iis erat, he had PL rect-I eram iis, we had rect-I eratis, ye had rect-I erant, they had >x3 s rect-iis essem, / would rect-us esses, thou wouldst rect-iis esset, he would rect-I essem iis, we would rect-I essetis, ye would rect-I essent, they would * 1 "3 < 8 a S s s 3 S. rSg-ar, I shall reg-eris, thou shalt reg-etiir, he shall PL reg-emur, we shall reg-eminl, ye shall reg-entiir, they shall - .1 1 a> 1 S. rect-iis ero, I shall rect-iis eris, thou shalt rect-iis erit, he shall PL rect-I grim us, we shall rect-I Sritls, ye shall rect-I grunt, they shall 1 •< OR WORD-FORMATION. CONJUGATION. VOICE. Imperative Mood. r&g-ere, reg-itor, be thou rSg-itor, let him be re'g-imlnl, reg-imlnor, be rdg-untor, let them be Infinitive Mood. reg-I, to be ruled. Participles. rectum essS, to -_. y o , . . ' : rect-us, ruled, have been ruled. rec-tum Iri, to be about to be ruled. r£g-endua, meet to be ruled. 40 ACCIDENCE, THE FOURTH ACTIVE Indicative Mood. Conjunctive Mood, 6 a h i £ B a; •jfi o a, S 5 S. Aud-lo, I hear aud-ls, thou hear est aud-it, he hears PL aud-Imiis, we hear aud-itls, ye hear aud-iunt, they hear. aiid-iam, I may aud-las, thou mayst aud-iat, he may aud-iamiis, we may aud-iatis, ye may aud-iant, they may S. aud-iebam, T was aud-lebas, thou uast aud-iebat, he was PL aud-iebamus, we were aud-iebat is, ye were aud-iebant, they were g < aiid-irem, I might aud-lres, thou mightst aiid-lret, he might aud-iremus, we might aud-iretis, ye might aud-irent, they might i 9 S. aiid-lvi, / heard aud-lvlstl, thou heardst aud-lvit, he heard PL aud-ivimus, we heard aud-lvlstis, ye heard aiid-lverunt, they heard. aud-lverim, / may aud-lveris, thou mayst aud-lverit, he may aud-lverimus, we may aud-lveritis, ye may aud-lverint, they may B S. aud-iveram, I had aud-lveras, thou hadst aud-lverat, he had PL aud-iveram iis, we had aud-lveratis, ye had aud-lverant, they had aud-lvlssem, / would aud-lvlsses, thou wouldst aud-ivisset, he ivould aud-lvlssemtis, we would aud-lvlssetis, ye would aud-ivissent, they would 6 J5 Pi i & S. aud-lam, / shall aud-ies, thou shalt aud-let, he shall PL aud-iemiis, we shall aiid-letis, ye shall aud-ient, they shall J aud-lturiis sim, I may aud-lturiis sis, thou mayst aud-lturiis sit, he may aud-lturl slmiis, we may aud-lturl sitis, ye may aud-lturl sint, they may © 1 I S. aiid-Tvero, I shall aud-lveris, thou shalt aud-lverlt, he shall PL aud-lverimus, we shall aud-lveVitls, ye shall aud-lverint, they shall 3 -3 f aud-lendl, 0/ hearing Gerunds. < aud-iendo, /or or oy hearing (^ aud-iendum. Me hearing. OR WORD-FORMATION. 41 CONJUGATION. VOICE. Imperative Mood. Infinitive Mood. Participles. j aud-I, aud-lto, hear tJiou aud-ito, let him hear aud-ite, aud-Itote, hear ye aud-Iunto, let them hear. aud-irg, to hear, or be hearing. aud-Iens, hearing. i aud-lvlss£, to have heard. aud-iturum essS, to be about to hear. aud-iturtis, about to hear. „ . j"aud-Itum, to hear 1 ? ' I aud ltu, to be heard. 12 ACCIDENCE, 53. THE FOURTH PASSIVE Indicative Mood. Conjunctive Mood. 6 c h g CD S. Aud-ior, / am aud-Iris, thou art aud-ittir, he is "^ Pi. aud-imiir, we are \ | aud-imini, ye are aud-iunttir, they are J aud-iar, I may aud-Iaris, thou mayst aud-iatur, he may aud-iamtir, we may aud -Xamlni, ye may aud-iantiir, they may J 5 B P. C CD &. B & aiid-iebar, /was aud-iebaris, Mom was^ aud-iebattir, he was PL aud-tebamiir, we were aud-iebamlni, ye were aud-iebanttir, they were aud-irer, I might aud-irer is, thou mightst aud-iretiir, he might aud-iremiir, we might aud-iremini, ye might aud-Irenttir, they might 8 - <*> S. aud-itus sum, / was aud-ltus es, thou wast aud-itus est, he wis PL aud-iti sum iis, we were aud-"it? estls, ye were aud-iti &uui, they were aud-itus sim, I may aud-itiis sis, thou mayst aud-itiis sit, he may aud-iti simiis, we may aud-iti sitis, ye may aud-iti sint, they may ft ■« S 5 .2 ' ti e a 3 "5. b b S. aud-ltus eram, / had aud-itus eras, thou hads aud-itus erat, he had PL aud-iti eramiis, we had aud-iti erutls, ye had aud-iti erant, they had a s u J aud-itiis essem, I would aud-itiis esses, thou wculdst aud-itiis esset, he would aud-iti essemiis, we would aud-iii essetis, ye would aud-iti essent, they would "S 1 6 b g S. aiid-tar, 7 shall aud-ieris, thou shalt s aud-ietiir, he shall PL aud-iemur, we shall aud-iemini, ye shall aud-Ientiir, they shall ^ 1 1 8 £ s 3 fa S. aud-itus 2ro, / shall aud-itus er is, thou shalt aud-itiis erit, he shall PL aud-iti ertm u s, we shall aud-iti iritis, ye shall aud-iti Srunt, they shall 8 6 "3 M 9 OR WORD-FORMATION. 43 CONJUGATION. VOICE. Imperative Mood. aud-ire', aud-itor, be thou aud-itor, let him be {ye aud-imlnl, aud-iminor, be aud-luntor, let them be Infinitive Mood. aud-Irl, to be heard. Participles, aud-itum esse, to have been heard. aud-itum IrT, to be about to be heard, aud-Itfis, heard. 'aud-lend&s. meet to be heard. *4 ACCIDENCE, ON THE SIGNS OF THE TENSES. § 54. Most of the Tenses have more than one Sign, or may be put into English in more than one way, though in the foregoing tables only one is given. SIGNS OF TENSES IN THE INDICATIVE MOOD. Pres. Amo, / — love, or am loving, Preterimp. Amabam, / — loved, or was loving, or used to love, Preterperf. Amavi, 1 — loved, or have loved. Preterplup. Amaveram, / had loved. Fut. Imp. Amabo, / — shall or will — love, or be loving. Fut. Perf. Amaver5, 1 — shall or will — have loved. SIGNS OF TENSES IN THE CONJUNCTIVE MOOD, WHEN POTENTIAL. Pres. Amem, / — may, or can, or would, or should, or could — love, or be loving. Preterimp. Amarem, / — might, or would, or should, or could — love, or be loving, or have been loving. Preterperf. Amaverim, 1 — may, or can, or might, or would, or should, or could — have loved, or love. Preterplup. Amavissem, / — might, or would, or should, or could — have loved. §55. Note 1. When the Conjunctive Mood is truly Subjunctive (that is to say, subjoined to governing Conjunctions or Relative Pronouns,} it often has the same signs as the Indicative: as, Laudaberis modo parentis. Thou wilt be praised if thou obeyest. Laudabar quum pdrerem. I was praised when I obeyed. Laudatur qu6d pdruerit. He is praised because he obeyed LaiidavT Sura qui pdruisset. I praised him who had obeyed. Note 2. The Present Conjunctive is also used for the Imperative Mood : as, Act. Amem, may I love, or let me love. Ames, mayst thou love, or love thou. Amet, may tie love, or let him Love. Amemiis, may we love, or let us love. Ametis, may ye love, or love ye. Anient, may they love, or let them love OR WORD-FORMATION. 46 Pass. A mer, may / be loved, or let me be loved. Ameris, mayst thou be loved, or be thou loved. Ametiir, may he be loved, or let him be loved. Amemur, may ive be loved, or let us be loved. Ameminl. may ye be loved, or be ye loved. Amentur, may they be loved, or let them be loved. A T o£e 3. The Infinitive in re stands for the Preterimperfect as well as for the Present Tense : and the Infinitive in isse stands for the Preterpluperfect as well as for the Preterperfect Tense : as (1) Dicit me amare. He says {that) I am loving. Dixit me amare. He said {that) I was loving. (2) Dicit me amavlsse. He says (that) I loved, or have loved. Dixit me amavlsse. He said (that) I had loved. VERBS JSf 10 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. § 56. Verbs in io of the Third Conjugation, in the Tenses derived from the Present-stem, throw away i before another i ; but keep it before a, o, u, and e, except before er or e final : as, rapi-5, rap-e, rapi-iint, rap-erg, rapi-ebam, rapi-am, rap-erem, rap-i, rapi- ens, &c. These Verbs are the following with their compounds : Capio. ciipio, facio, jacio, Fugio, fodio, pari 5, lacio, Rapio, sapio, specio, quatio, GrSdicr, morior, potior, patior. J 57. VARIETIES OF FORM. (a) The following changes are made in the several Con- jugations, chiefly by the poets : 1. Avis into as ; as, amasti for amavisti ; zimasse for amavisse. Aver into ar ; as, amarunt for amaverunt ; amaram for amaveram. 46 ACCIDENCE, II. Evis into es ; as, implessem for lmplevissem * lmplessB for Implevlsse. Ever into er ; as, Implerunt for impleverunt ; implero for implevero. IV. Iv into i; as, audiit for audlvit; atidierunt for au- dlverunt. Ivis into m, or is ; as, audiisse and audisse for audi- vlsse. Note. Novl, in the Third Conjugation, changes wis into os ; as, nostl for novisti : and over into or ; as, noram for noveram. Petlvi from peto, and desivi from destno, take the same changes as Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation. (Jb) The Third Person Plural of the Preterperfect Active often ends in ere instead of erunt; as, Amaveriint or amaverS. Monueriint or monuerfi. Rexeriint or rexere. Audlverunt or audlvere. Note. We must not change dvSre into are", or Svere" into Srt : thus, amavere must not become amare, nor iUipleVerl ImplerS, because these are the forms of the Infinitive. (c) In the Second Persons Singular of several Passive Tenses, re is often put for ris ; as, I. Amabaris or amabare ; amaberis or amabere. Aniens or amere ; amareris or amarere. II. Monebaris or monebare ; moneberis or monebere. Monearis or moneare ; monereris or monerere. III. Eegebaris or r6gebare ; regeris or rggere. Regans or regare ; regereris or regerere. IV. Audiebaris or audiebare ; audieris or audiere. Audiaris or audiare ; audireris or audlrere. Note, It is not usual to write re for ris in the Second Person Present Passive, on account of the confusion with Infin. Act. and Imperat. Pass. But in Deponent Verbs the change is less objectionable ; as, hortarS for hortaris. (d) In the Passive Tenses formed with the Auxiliary Verb sum, fiii may be used for sum ; fueram for eram ; fuero for ero ; fiierim for sim ; and tuissem for es- sem ; with a stronger past force : as, OR WORD-FORMATION. 47 Amatus Monitus Rectus Audittis sum or f iil, I ivas, or have been eram or fueram, / had been ero or fuero, I shall have been sim, or fiierim, I may have been ta essem, or fuissem, I should have been loved, advised, ruled, heard. (e) Dico, diico, facio make in the Second Person Imperative die, due, fac. (f) The old Infinitive Passive in ier for % is sometimes used by the epic poets ; as, amarier for amarl. (g) The Participle in dus of 3d and 4th Conj. is sometimes formed in undus as well as endus, especially that of Verbs in to ; as faciendus or faciundus. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. § 58. The Participles in rus and dus maybe conjugated with all the Tenses of the Verb sum : and this is called the Periphrastic Conjugation ; as, (/) am was Amaturus sum — es — est Amaturi sumiis — estis ACTIVE VOICE. have been ffi fulsti ftttt fuimiis fuistis eram Sras erat eramus eratis shall be er5 eris erit erimus eritis shall have been fuero ffi eris fuerlt fuerimiis fueritis — sunt erant fiierunt erunt fuerlnt And the other Moods in like manner. 3 PASSIVE VOICE. Amandiis Am and I (/) am sum es est sumiis estis sunt was eram eras erat gramiis eratis erant have been fui fulsti flllt fuimiis fuistis fuerunt shall be 6ro ens grit erimus eritis erunt shall have been fuero fueris fiierit fuerimiis fueritis fuerlnt -I *« And the other Moods in like manner. Aoto, The Participle in dus is often called the Gerundive. 48 ACCIDENCE, DEPONENT VERBS. § 59 Deponent Verbs follow the Passive Conjugation, but take also Gerunds, Supines, and Participles Active. Intransitive Deponents want the Supine in u, and Participle in dus. Ca) CONJUGATION OF TRANSITIVE DEPONENTS. 1 / exhort. H5rt- Hort- Hort- Hort- Hort- Hort- Hort- Hurt- Hort- Hort- Hort- Hort- Hort- or aris at us sum art andi ando andum atum atu. ans atiis aturiis and iis. fear, ver-eor ver-eris ver-ittis sum ver-erl ver-endl ver-end5 ver-endum ver-itum ver-itu ver-ens ver-ittis ver-ituriis ver-endus. 3 speak, loqu-5r loqu-eris locu-tus sum 16qu-I loqu-endl loqu-endo loqu-endum locu-tum locu-tu loqu-ens locu-tiis locu-turiis loqu-endiis. 4 divide. part-ior part-iris part-itiis sum part-irl part-iendl part iendo part-iendum part-itum part-itu part-iens part-itiis part-Iturus part-iendus. {b) CONJUGATION OF INTRANSITIVE DEPONENTS 1 2 I wander, Vag-or Vag-aris Vag-atiis sum Vag-arl Vag-andl Vag-ando None Vag-andum Vag-atum Vag-ans Vag-atus Vag-aturus. 3 4 fall, fawn. lab-or bland-ior lab-ens bland-iris lap-sus sum bland-itiis sunr. lab-i bland-iri lab-endi bland-iendl lab-endo bland-iendo lab-endum bland-iendum lap-sum bland-itum lab-ens bland-iens lap-siis bland-itus lap-surus. bland-itiiriis. OR WORD -FORMATION 49 VERBA DERIVATA, DERIVED VERBS. § 60. I. Frequentativa, Frequentative Verbs, express the repetition of an action, are of the 1st Conjuga- tion, and end in -ito, -to, -tor : as, rog-ito, / ask often, from r5g-o ; mm-itor, I threaten often, from min-or ; can-to, I sing often, from can-o. II. Inceptiva or Inehoativa, Inceptive Verbs, express the beginning of an action, are of the 3rd Con- jugation, and end in -asco, -esco, -isco. Some are derived from Verbs : as, Lab-asco, I begin to totter; from lab-o, (lab-as). Pall-esco, / turn pale ; „ pall-eo, (pall-es). Trem-isco, I begin to tremble; „ trem-o, (trem-is). Sc-isco, / begin to know ; „ sci-o, (scis). Some from Nouns : as, Puer-asco, / become a boy ; from puer. Mlt-esco, I become mild; „ niltis. III. Desiderativa, Desiderative Verbs, express the de- sire of an action, are of the 4th Conjugation, end- ing in -urio^and derived from Supines in -um : as, Es-iiri5, / am hungry ; from ed5, es-um. VERBA ANOMALA, IRREGULAR VERBS. § 61. Irregular Verbs are such as do not form their Tenses according to the common rules : as, (1) Possum, potes, potiil, posse, potuisse, potens, to be able. (2) Volo, vis, voltil, velle, voltiisse, volendi, volendo, volen- dum, volens, to be willing. (3) Nolo, n on vis, nolm, nolle, noliiisse, nolendi, nolendo, nol(~ndum, nolens, to be unwilling. (4) Mal5, mi* vis. malul, malle, maluisse, malendi, malendo malendum, malens, to be more ivilling. (5) Eo, is, Ivi, ire, Ivisse, itiirum esse, Sundi, eundo, eun- dum, itum, Itu, guns or lens, lturiis, to go. (6) Fero,fers. ttili, ferre, tiilisse, laturum esse, fer£ndi, fer- endo, ferendum, latum, latu, ferens, laturtis, to bear (7) Flo, fis, factus sum, fieri, factum esse, factum In fact iis, faciendus, to become or be made. (&) Feror, f erris, latus sum, f erri, latum essfc, latum Iri, latus, f erendus, to be borne. 60 §62. ACCIDENCE, J-" J T i 4 * 4 3 id ■ • +5 3 jD B ID l :3 B ID s 13 5 >D 10 ■ 1 | CO 1 a la a 1 » i-< ico ice • i ii c/3 ID H co JD l ID 'g ID >D >3 s CO >B '33 CO >3 <* 2 3 is s S ■ >3 3 ID >3 1 >3 s ID >3 s ID J *i- >D >b r-* — 1 Jl C In D 'U i f ■55 ( S ice ice i • ii ■ "3 1 T *? 45 ^ 1* >3 n >D >D hi ID >D >3 1 >D >^ 1 «o CO CO CO ■ CO CO >D ^* i i ii id ID ID ID >3 >D i-< i v: l l In 1 ■*■' 1 fi CO Pot-tierim Vol-iierim Nol-uerim Mal-uerim r— *— » * 7j Pos-sim VSl-im ) Nol-im 1 Mal-im J E-am 1 Fer-am 1 Fi-am J Fer-ar B d a C/3 ig ft Vel-lem Nol-lem Mal-lem 3 d s a D D Si >D JD p5 S- >D U ID Iv-Srim Tiil-erim Factus 1 Latiis J *» • H possun volunt. snolunt malunt Sunt. ferunt. flu lit. fSruntu: 3 'S3 >3 ice jo ID ice -3 '5 753 >3 3 ice JO ID B 19 ID >3 ID l3 • (0 1 ■ 1 J S 1 1 w | « | S| '§ 1 2 e c 1 j3 >D CO ice jo ID i ile -3 ■ ile jo ID *B 1 ice JO ID 1 CO CO f CO S >3 1 I possumus volumtis nolumus malumus imiis ferimus fimiis ferimur 73 >3 3 MS i- >D CO s ID 73 >3 s M -O CO 3 ice JO ID Ii )3 B ice JO ID CO 1 a )3 CO CO '~ A ^ I S w c >-h ice \es 1 1 4^. — , S- 1 1 potest vult nonvul mavult it fert fit fertiir MS >D 1 xe JO ID 1 Ml JO >ce J2 ID 53 1 ID >3 1 ! potes vis nonvls mavis Is fers fls ferns 73 M .3 -a ID 73 '3 co «ce JO ID *2 ID 3 •T g 8 I 3 £ s I 1 e jo ce ID JO si Ia > >D i- B ce >ce , rt .« ,_ 11 A > CO 5 ^ 5/5 IB 12 12 lo 5 ° to >5 "O "2 io >5 12 >d >d id id '^ >o O "O ^ {Jh> ^ S g 3 ID >D E&i >3 53 >3 >3 53 O 75 |£ lv-I Tul-i Factu Latiis - •asuax juosaaj •jaajjaduiiao^ajj *ic>d)ja(tjd)ajj OR WORD-FORMATION. 51 t3 1 S3 co F >a 1 H 1 Ig o !S3 >3 12 •< SSSE 0) 0> CD & *— «. CO ' co £ Ia> » S $ " Oi 1 * ^ 3 JS 3 >3 o y. 8 «9 •r >3 £ >o >o io •« > >0 irt \7t Hfa J ooiois J 3 i§ ieL (^ > £ g £ H ^ >-l •pajj3dn{djaj8Jj •3 l=« •3 q 19 To IO a ll xb >o OS IO .« IC IO a i3 IO xu 1 IO xy a .- IO £ 1 c >CJ >i> i^ ioC (O in B To 'O 8 xo I ."— s /~S/^\ / ~ N CO **5 CO r- is s a ,Q I0> 10) S-l -H >9 co >rj 3 i s ^Q 14) IO) c >3 >3 3= S S pD IO) IO> jg >s J C i2i5_ 2 »» io» '2 S | S S B h J> -i —■ -i 'O jl c« ' >o >o £ «2 ^? >S li >3 >3 >3 >? 'g XL jS 2 j, j j A >o j, ts '5 >o >o io ig • >3 ica lea •;oajjadm [ ajn^nj | •y?sjja { ][ aatvinj 52 ACCIDENCE, § 63. C°) Edo, / eat, edis or es, edi, edere or esse, edlsse, esurum esse, edendi, edendo, edendum, esurn, esu, edens, esuriis, to eat. Pres. Indic. Act. Sing. Ed5, edis or es, edit or est : Plur. edimus, editis or estis, edunt. Conjunct Preterimp. Act. Sing. Ederem or essem, ederes or esses, edergt or esset . Plur. Sing. Plur. ederemus or or essent. essemus, ederetis or essetis, ederent Imperative Mood. 2d Pers. Ede or es ; edito or est5 ; 3d Pers. edito or esto ; 2d Pers. edite or este, editote or estote ; 3d Pers. eduntd. Ob*. The other Tenses are regular : also the Passive Voice ; except that esttir may be used for editur, and essetiir for ederetur. VERBA DEFECTIYA, DEFECTIVE VERBS. 64. Defective Verbs are such as want many of the usual parts of a Verb. (1) Aio, I say ; and Inquam, say I. Indic. rAio ais ait aiiint. aiebam aiebas aiebat aiebamiis aiebatis aiebam Covj. aias aiat aiant Indic. Inquam Con). inquis inquit inquimus inquitis inquiunt inquias. inquiat. mquiatis. inquiant inquiebam inquiebas — inquiebat inquiebamiis inquiebatis inquiebant. — CR WORD-FORMATION. 58 Preferperf. — , inquisti, Inquit, — , inquistis, — . Fut. Imperf. — , Inquies, Inqmet. Imper. inque, Inquito ; Inquite. Part, of alo, alens. 5 65. (2) Qu&so, 1 entreat; 1st Pers. PI. qu&sumua. (3) Fari, to speak ; used by the Poets in this and a few other forms, as fatiir, he speaks ; fabor, / shall speak ; fare, speak thou ; Part (fans), f antis, 8tc. ; fetus ; fandus ; Ger. fandi, fando ; Sup. fatu. (4) The Imperatives ; Apage, begone. Ave, avete, hail ; Infin. avere. Cedo, cedite, or cette, give me. Salve, salvete, hail; Infin. salvere ; Fur. sal- vebis. Vale, vvilete, farewell ; Infin. valere. (5) Aiisim, afisis, ausit — , — , aiisint : for audeani, I may dare. Faxim, faxis, faxit, faximiis, faxitis, faxint : for faciam, / may do, or fecerim, / may have done. Also faxo, for faciam, I shall do, or fecer5, I shall have done. (6) Prseteritiva ; or Verbs conjugated only in the Pre- terperfect and its derived Tenses ; ccepi, / begin ; 5di, I hate ; memini, / remember. 66. Indie. t fCoepi f 1 0di . Conj. coeperim oderim meminerim In Jin. coepisse. odisse. meminisse. Part. c&pissem. odissem. — — meminissem. — — — coapturum esse osiirum esse c&pturus. osuriis. 4 fCoeperam 5 < Oderam £ ^Memineram % f Cceper5 * i Odero | LMeminero. — — — Imper. Sing. Mement5, Plur. mementote. Obs. 1. For ccepl and its Tenses may be used the Passive cceptus sum and its Tenses before an Infinitive Passive. Obs. 2. Novi, I know t Preterp. of nosco, is also used as a Praeteritive. 64 ACCIDENCE, § 67 (7) Impersonal Verbs are conjugated only in the Third Persons Singular of the Proper Moods, and in the Infinitive Mood. A. Impersonal Verbs Active have no Passive Voice. The principal of these are of the 2nd Conjugation. Op5rtet, t&det, miserSt, Piget, piidet, poenitet, Libet, licet, liquet, et Decet atque dedecet. Pres. Preterimp Preterperj. Preterplu. Fut. Imp. Fut. Per/. indie. Opdrtet Oportebat Opdrtuit Op5rtuerat Oportebit. Op or tiler it. Conjunc. oporteat oporteret oporttierit oportiiisset Infin. oportere. oportuisse. The Persons are expressed by the Cases following the Verb j as, Sing. Oportet me, it behoves me, or / am behoven. Op5rtet te, — thee, or thou art — Opdrtet eum, — him, or he is — Plur. OportSt nos, — us, or we are — Oportet vos, — you, or ye are — Oportet eos, — ■ them, or they are — And so in the other Tenses. § 68. B. Intransitive Verbs may be used impersonally in the Passive Voice : as, luditiir, from ludo, I play. Indie. Conjunc. Infin. Pres. Luditur ludatur ludi. Preterimp. Ludebatiir luderetur. Preterperf. Lusum est lusum sit lusum esse. Preterplu. Lusum erat lusum esset lusum fuissS. Fut. Imp. Ludetiir — lusum iri. Fut. Per/. Lusum erit. — — OR WORD- FORMATION. 55 The Persons are expressed by an Ablative Case with the Preposition a or ab following the Verb : as, Pres. Indie. Sing. Luditiir a me, it is played by me, or I play, Luditiir a te, — thee, or thou playest. Luditiir ab eo, — him. or he plays, Plur, Luditiir a nobis — us, or we play. Luditiir a vobis, — you or ye play, Luditiir ab eis, — them or they play. And so in the other Tenses. § 69. C. The Neuter of the Gerundive Participle in dus, is used impersonally, in the same manner, with a Dative or Ablative after it to mark the Per- sons : as, Pres. Indie. &Ludendum est mini, it must be played by me, or / Ludendum est tibi, — thee, or thou Ludendum est ei, — him, or he P.Ludendum est nobis, it must be played by us, or we Ludendum est vobis, — you, or ye Ludendum est eis, — them, or they • And so in the other Tenses. <*The Particles are treai»d of in other parts of this Grammar ) 1 56 L OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS § 70. A. GENERAL RULES. Virl, Populi, et Divl, Ventl,Menses,Montes, Rivi Generis sunt Masciilinl. (2.) Plantce, Divce, Femince, Terra?, Urbes, Insula? Generis sunt Feminini. (3.) Vox indeclinabilis Neutriiis est Generis. (4.) Sunt Communis Generis CiviSy hostis, juvents, Testis, judex, artifex, Auctor, exsul, oplfex, Comes, here's, hospes, dux y ObseSy interprets, conjux, Incoldy sdcerdoSy vlndex, AdolescenSy infans, index, Parens, pra?sul, par, custos, Munlceps, sdtelles, bos. Miles, vates, augury grus, Cants, tigris, serpens, sus: Dama, talpd jungimiis. B. OF GENDER IN THE DECLENSIONS. § 71. I. FIRST DECLENSION; PRINCIPAL RULE. A St e sunt Fenrinina ; As St es sunt MasculM. EXCEPTIONS. MasculmS sunt In a Musculorum nomlnJi, Ut nautd, vSrnd St p#et<& Scurrd, scrlbd gt prtiphetdL GENDER OP NOUNS. 57 § 72. II. SECOND DECLENSION. PRINCIPAL RULE. Masctilinls us et er, Neutris um tribuitiip. EXCEPTIONS. (1) Feminina sunt In us Alvus, drctiis, car bus us, CUus, humus, methodus; (2) Neutra virus, pglagus, Vulgus fere Neutrum sXt, Masculum sublnde fit. J 73. III. THIRD DECLENSION, (a) FIRST PRINCIPAL RULE. Masciilis Insentur Quod claudit o, or, os, vel er, Et Nomen desmens in es Si flectit casus impares. EXCEPTIONS. (1) HIS Femlnin& sunt In do et go qua? destnunt : Sed MasculinS manent cdrdd, Ligo, ordo atque' margo. (2) Sunt In io FemlnlnS: Tantum Ilia Masctilina, Quee vel oculis spectabis, Vgl tii manibus tractabis. (3) Card (carnh) mavult se Femininls adderS. (4) Neutra paiica sunt in or s ^lqu6r, ador, mdrmo'r, c6r Feminlnum est arbo'r. (5) Femtmna cos et dds, Neutra sunt iitrumque' os, (6) Neutra multa sunt In er, Verber, slier, dclfr, ver, TubSr, uber, 5t cadaver, Piper, iter, et papuver. (7) JEs est Neutrum ; sex In es Qua? flectiint casus impares Fenilnina, compts, ttiges, Merces, merges, quies, seges. §74. (b) SECOND PRINCIPAL RULE. FeminTnTs Inseras Quiti eladdunt » x, aus et as, S cum consonante nexa, Es sequaliter Inflexa. fS GENDER OF NOUNS. HX CAPTIONS. y\ ) Multa sunt quae claudlt is Masculini Generis, Amnis, axis, cdllis, collis, Caulis, ciicumis etfollis, Fdscls, funis, fustis, finis, Ignis, Drbis atque crinis, Pdnis, pitcts, postis, ensis, Sentis, cdrbis, torquis, mensts, Torris, unguis et ciinults, Ve~ctis, vermis et soddlis, Cassis, cinis, glis et dng?ds, Lapis, pulvls atque sanguis. (2) PleraquS quae claudlt ex Maseulina sunt, iit grix : Sed Femlnina manent nex, Supellex, ilex, carex, lex. (8) Maseulina sunt in ix Fornix, phoenix et calix (4) Maseulina sunt in as Fas ( vadis ), gigds, clephds, As (dssis), mas et dddmds, Neutra, vds (vdsis), nefds,fds (5) Mascullnls adde mons, Fons et torrtns, gryps et pons, Rud'tns, hydrops, dens et bidens Or tens, occidens et tridtns. (6) Maseulina sunt In es Verres et acindces. § 75. (c) THIRD PRINCIPAL RULE. Neutra claudunt aete, | Ar, ur, us, c, I, n et t EXCEPTIONS. (1) Maseulina sunt in ur Furfur, turtur, vultur,fur. (2) Masciillna sunt in us LSpiis (leporis) et mus. (3) Femlnina sunt In us Virtus atque servit/ls, Juve?itus, incus atque palus, Senectus, tellus atque sdlus, Quibus longa manet u In Genitlvl transitu. (4) Est et pecus (picudis) Feminlnl Generis. (5) Mascula In I sunt mugil, Consul, sal, sdl atque pngil (6) Maseulina sunt ren, splcn, Pectin, delphin, dttdyen. (7) Femlnina sunt in on Gdrgon, sindon, halcyon. § 7C IV. FOURTH DECLENSION. PRINCIPAL RULE. Masculls In Quarta us, Neiitrls u tribuimus. EXCEPTIONS. FgxnlnmS sunt In Us Quirts dfimus, pOrtlcOs* Aciis, Idus atque' mdnus, Tribus, niirU8, socrus, anus, PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES. 59 5 77. V. FIFTH DECLENSION. PRINCIPAL RULE. Feminlnls Inseres Quintse nomina in e$. EXCEPTION. Dies est in Slngiilo In Plurall Niimdra Mas vSl Femininum : Semper Mascullnunin II. IRREGULAR NOUNS. §78. I. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER. (a) Singiilaris Numerus Miiltis deest Nominibus : Ut Manes, locull, Penates ; Cuna, thermos, nugS, grates ; Armd, viscera, magalld, Cum deum festls, tit FWr&lid (6) Lectitantlbus apparent Miilta qua? Plurall carent. II. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN CASE. NonnullI casus absunt his, Et multa prieter ha?c apparent Fas, frugis, ddpis, opts, vis : Quae casibiis nonniillis carent. III. NOUNS REDUNDANT IN NUMBER. In a vel 1 qua? efferunt Numerum Pluralem, sunt Frenum, cdrbasus St locus, Rdstrum, sibilus St jocus, Tartarus fit in Plural! Tdrtdrd, et caelum call, IV. NOUNS REDUNDANT IN CASE. Abundant qusedam Casibiis, | Ut ddmus, laurus, (Edipiis, III. OF THE PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES OF LATIN VERBS. §79. I. FIRST CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBa Verborum Prima Conjiigatio, Cm 6 as are termmatio, Avi in Perfecto fit, Siipino atum subjicit. (Am-o, am-as, am-are, am-avi, am-atum.) 60 PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES* EXCEPTIONS. Lav 5 lavl Id turn cutt, Et lavdtum vlndicat. (4) Dd fit dedi atquS ddtum, Std fit steti at que - statum. (5) Micd dat Perfectum miciiU Plied dat Perfectum piicul ; Nullum fert Siiplnum micd 9 ~dtum dat vel -itum plied. (1 ) HTnc excipiendS sunt Quae ul itum erFerunt : Crgpd, ciibd atque sdnd, Dtimd, vetd atque tdnd, (2) S#cd sifcui atquS sectum; Fried friciii atque frictum. CS) Juvd juvi jUtum stat; §80. II. SECOND CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBSL Verbdrum Altera Conjugatio, Cul eo es ere termlnatio, Ul in Perfecto fit, Supm5 itum siibjicit. (MSn-So, mones, mon-ere, mon-uT, mon-itum.^ EXCEPTIONS. (1) Hlnc exclplenda sunt Qua? evi Stum efFerunt : Ut ned nSvi atque netum ; Deled del-e"vi -etum. Addefled, P m, his, Et died, cum compositls. (2) His in di Perfectum stat, Sum Suplnum terminate Pi dndi prdnsum prdnded ; Sedi sessum sided ; Vidi visum video. S&d spdndSd spopdndi spdnsum ; Tdndid totdndi tdnsum ; Mdmdrdi mdrsum mdrded ; Pependi pSnsum pended. S) His In si Perfectum fit, Sum Siiplnum exigit. Jussi jussum jiibed ; Mulsi mulsum miilced Dat, ftldemque' mulge'd ; TSrsi tersum teryed ; Arsi arsum drd€d ; Risi visum rided ; Sudsi sudsum sudde"d ; Mdnsi mdnsum mdned ; Hast hcesum hared. Sic St dlySd alsi dat, Fulged fulsi vlndicat ; Urg$d Item ursi fit ; Sed his Suplnum deficit. (4) Dant si et turn indulged, Et tor- si tor -turn tor-qued. (5) Auged auxi auctum fit ; Friged frixi susciplt; Luged, luced, luxi dant, Sed non Suplnum generant. (6) Ha?c Perfecto volunt vi, Turn Siiplno sufficl : Caved cdvi atque cautum ; Fdveo fdvi atque fautum ; Fdved fdvi atque fdtum ; Mdved mdvi atque mdtum ; Voved vdvi atque vdtum. (7) His iii In Perfecto stat, Turn Suplnum terminat. D&t ddcid ddctum ; dat mistum mU- cifo ; sdrptum Sdrbfo; fit tened tentum ; fit tdrrSa tdstum, (8) His Prater itum Passive, Praesens scrlbitur Active; Audid dat ausus sum ; Gauded gdvisus sum ; StiledquS sdlitus sum PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES. ffl § 83 III. THIRD CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. Verborum Tertia ConjugatTo, Cm 5 is ere terminatio, Perfectum vari«je formse dat, Turn vel sum Supino stat. (Reg-o, reg-is, rex-i, reg-erg, reet-um.) Special Rules with §82. (a) Bd et pd. Bd, pd habent additum Perfecto psi, Supino ptum : Ut nubd nupsi atque nuptum. EXCEPTIONS. liumpd tamen rupx ruptum ; BlbO bibl bibitum ; Strtipd str&pul strepilum. (b) Cd, gd, hd, qud. Cd, gd, hd, quo, sic declino, XI Perfecto, ctum Supino : Ut ducd duxl atque ductum; Sugd siixi atque suctum ; Eego rexl atque rectum ; Vehd vexl atque vectum. EXCEPTIONS. (1) Scd Perfecto jiibet vi, Turn Supino siibjicl ; Ut cresco crevl cretum ; suesco Suevl suetum ; sic quiescd. Nosed ndvl ndtum dat ; Pdscd pdvl pdstum stat. Cdmp&scd fit cdmpescul ; Pdpdscl pdscd ; dlscd didici. (2) Ted let atque ictum; Vlncd vicl atque victum ; Llnqud liqui atque lictum. (3) Pared dat pepercl pdrsum. (4) Spdrgd sparst atque spdrsumj Mirgd mSrsi atquS mersum ; TlrgO tirai atqug tersum. their Exceptions. (5) Ago egl atque actum ; Frdngd fregl atque frdctum / Tango tetigl et tdctum ; Pdngd pepigi et pactum ; Sed composta-pep? -pactum; Pungd pupugl et punctum ; Jungd junxl atque junctum. Lifgd legl vlndlcat, Compostum ssbpe lexl dat. (6) Figd fixl flxum ; fingd Finxl atque fictum ; pingd Pinri f aclt atque plctum ; String d strlnxl atque' strict um, (c) Do. Do Perfecto jiibet si, Sum Supino sufflcl. Last lazsum faclt latdd ; (Verum cessl cessumcidC:) Sic il-lidd -list -llsum ; Divldd di-visl -visum. EXCEPTIONS. ( 1 ) Quae exeunt in dndd, Sudd, Flecte dd in di vertendo. Pendd fit pependl pensum Tendd dat tetendi tensum. (2) Flndd tamen fidl flssum ; Sclndd scidl atque scissum i Fundd fudl atqu&fiisum; Tundo tutudi et tusum. Cudd cudi atque cusum ; Cddd c&cidi et cusum; Ccedd fit cticldi canon § Faclt idd Sdi e»uru 62 PRETERPERFECTS AXD SUPEN'ES. (3) AbdS, dddd, cdndd, cr&lli, Obdd, perdU, reddd, edd, PrCdO, trddd, vendo, dedd, Quae a dd composta sunt, -didi, ditum, eflerunt : Ut edd edidi St Solium, Dedd decRdi et dSdUunu id) To. Flectd flexi atque flexum ; 2?2ct8 next atque nexum ; Pectd pexi atque' pexum ; Petivi St petitum petd ; Messui et messum metO ; Mittd mist mlssum dat ; Vertd vSrfi versum stat. Verbum quod a sistd fit Perfecto -stiti sufflcit § 83. («) 5b. So" stct situm fit ; drcessG Sic formatur, et lacesso. VisO rwi vlndicat ; Pi/wo" /h/ismi plstum dat. § 84. (/) & L'nura In xtf ^er3 stat, Quod texui textum vlndicat. | 85. (g) Lo. Ld lul turn : sic consuls Flectitur ; et Gcculo. Sed colul et cultum cold, Molui mdlitum fit molo A cello verba ceUui ; Sed percello percuti Conjugabis et pircuhum , Pello pipuXi et pulsion ; Velio velli (v&si) vtUsum. Fdllo ritfefeltifalsum; Psallo psdlli ; solid salsum ; TdUd sustull formatum In Supino fit subldtum. « Mo. Md mux mitum fit ; Ktfrimd Fr&nul fremitum ; sic g#md, Et Supino carens trgmd EXCEPTIONS. Si turn : cdmd cdmsl cdmtum, Promo promsi atque prdmtum % Sic flectuntiir sumo, demO i Sed enii atque emtum imd ; Pressl atque pressum premd. (Inter m St * vel t Latinl saepe ponunt p. Sic fiunt sumpsi, dempsi, dSmp~ turn., Cdmptum, promptum, sumption, emptum.) (•) No. Cdnd cantum cidni, Composta -centum -cinil ; Gignd genui ginitum ; POnd posul positum ; Temnd temsi temtum d&t ; Sternd strdcl stratum stat. Sperno spred atque' spretum Cento" cred atque cretum ; Llnd led atque litum ; SinO sivl atque situm. U) no. Verro verri atque* vSrsum ; Curro dat cucurrl cursum ; Quaro fit qua-sivi -situm j Tero trivi atque tritum ; Uro ussi ustum stat ; Gero gessi gestum dat ; Fero tuli atque latum ; Sero sevi atque sdtum; Sero serui sertum dat, ST cum vl nectendi stat. § 86. (4) lo. Fdcidfeci atque factum ; Jdciojed atqu&jdctum ; Dant a ZaciS Zexi ledum ; Et a specid spexi spec turn ; FocP.Dfodi fit ftissumqui ; Ft^io/w^Z/tt^wwquS ; Ca/?io cejoi at^ue caption / Rapid rdpul et rdptum ; PRETERPERFECTti AND SUPINES. 63 Cup-lvl -Hum cupid ; Pip£ri pdrtum pdrio ; Qudtid qudssum vindicat, SSd In compostls cussum dat 87. (J) Ud St vd. UO format wi utum : Ut tribud tribul tributum. Vb" Inflectlt vi St utum : Ut solvo solvl et sdlutum g VdlvQ volvi et vol utum. EXCEPTIONS. Flud tarn en fluxum flux\ ; Struo structum atque struxi t Vivo vixl victum dat ; Stinguo stinxl stlnctum stat. IV. FOURTH CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBH Verborum Quarta Conjilgatio, Cul id is ire terminatio, Ivi in Perfects fit, Supin5 itum sufficit. (Aiid-io, aiid-is, aud-ire, aud-lvl, aud-Itum.) EXCEPTIONS. SdnctO sdnxl sanctum fit ; Nee -civl -citum respuit. Vlnxl vlnctum vincid ; Fulsl fultum fulciO ; Sdrcid fit sdrsi sdrtum ; Fdrcidque fdrsl fdrtum ; Amicio dmicul dat; Sdlid sdlul (sdlii) stat ; At singultid sinyiiltum ; Et sep&lio sepultum ; Venzd v&ni vSntum fit ; ( Ve~neo venil suscipit ) ; Se~pid s€psi septum dat ; A perio -p£rul -pertum stat ; Sed cdmperid cdmpirl ; Et reperio repperl. Hausl haustum haurxH j Sensi seusum sentiO. ( 89. V. DEPONENT VERBS Deponentia flexeris Ex Actlvorum regulis ; Nam Pr&teritum Passlvum Siipini est Derivatlvum. EXCEPTIONS. (I) SECOND CONJUGATION. R8dr rdtiis efflcit ; Mis&redr misertus fit ; Fdtior fdssiis ; flectS sis Fessiis in composltis. (2) THIRD CONJUGATION. Labor lapsus suscipit ,• Utor usiis efficit ; Loquor effTcit IdcuHts # Sequor efficit s^cutHs ; 64 CHANGES OF VERBS IN COMPOSITION. Nitdr ntsiis riixus stat ; Irutus sum irdscdr dat ; Qu&rdr quSstus ; grddidr gres- SUS ; Pdtidr passiis sum, £t -pessics In compostis ; fit u/ciscdr Ultus ; dptus sum dplscdr ; S£d ddeptus ddipiscdr ; Prdftciscdr fit prdfectus / Expergiscdr experrectiis ; Fit Oblltus obliviscor ; Et cOmmentus comminlscdr / Sed ndnclscor f acit niichls « Et pdciscor f acit pdctiis. Mdrtuus sum f acit moridr ; Ndscor nut us ; ortus oritir Quels Futura moriturus, Ndsciturus, drlturus. (3) FOURTH CONJUGATION Quartae mensus metidr , Format orsws Ordidr ; At experior expertug, Et oppcridr dppertus. 90. VI. INCEPTIVE VERBS. (1) A Verbis ducta Inceptlva Flex&ris tit Primltlva : Sic ixdrsi exdrdescd, Obsdlevi dbsdISscd ; Trgmui vlndicat tr&miscO t Et rescivi fit resciscd. (2) Factorum ex No minibus Perfectls ul terminus : Evdnescd sic Svaniii ; CdnsdnescO fit cdnsdnui. Plurima Siiplnis carent, Perfecta, miiltis non apparent VII. IMPERSONAL VERBS. lmpersonalia flexgris Ex Personalium regiills ; Sic pudft f acit puduit ; Pasnitfr pcenituit ; Opdrtit sic 6pGrtv.iL Sed miseret misgrtum Sst ; LibSt libuit libitum Sst ; Tadet dat pertasum Sst Vel t&duit i sic pigSt fit Pigitum est et ptguit. VIII VERBS WANTING PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES. In 5pe'ribus Latinis, Multa Verba quse Supinis, Multa quee Perfecto carent, Lectitantibus apparent § 91. IV. OF THE CHANGES OF VERBS IN COMPOSITION. (1) A In e converteris Horum in Compost tis : ArdOy cSrpO, ddmnd, lactd, Fdtlscdr, falW, fdrcid, jdctd, Grddidr , pdtidr, pdrtldr, trdctb Pdrid, patrdy atque candd, Sacrdj spdrgd. atquS sc&ndG. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 65 (2) A In ? converteris Horum In Composltis : Ago, cttdb, cdub, frangb, Hiibcb, lUttb, ftitcor, pdngb, Sttlib, sttftub, atque tango, C&pib, r&pib, scipio, fttcib, J&cib, Idcio, p/dccb, t&cib. Excepta : ptrtlgb, ptrpl&ctb ; £tcum Adverblls mlstum fbtcib. (3) A^xn u convertlto Ex cdlcb , saltb, qudtib. (4) E In i converteris Horum in Composltis : Egcb, tinib, atque tmb, Spccib, stdhb, atque prcmb, Adde dedi atque It go, Adde stttti atque rtgb. Sunt excepta : rtlego, Pirltgb, et praltgd, Nnta. ST, mutato Simpllci, Compost! Priesens sumsit i, In Perfecto siimet c : Si longam valet fingerS : Sic deficio fit difici ; Sic prbjicib project . Sic cbnspicib cbnspexi ; Sic a dirtgb dircxi. P'trgb (pir-rtgb) perrcxi ; Surgb (siis-rcgo) surrtx'i ; Pbrrigb (pro-rcgo) pbrrczx, (5) jE In i, a quairb, cckdo Composta mutant, et a ladb, (6) Au in o convertit plaudb ; Ail in u commiitat claiido t Au in t solummodo Ex audio dat obedib, (7) Redupllcatlo Slmplicls Exibit e Compositis : Sic a pt/lb, ptpiili, Fit xmpillo, impiili,. Sed a disco, posco, do" Composta servant, et a sfo. § 92. OF PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION ^1) Con- fit Pra?posItio cum, Quando stat compositum. v'2) Tantum in Composltis Stant ambi, rt, si, sus, et dis. (3) Prseposltlo termmantem Szepe mutat consonantem Sic, tit flat si mills Consonant! Slmplicls : Ut ad-ft-rd fit ajfrro, Ut in-lhio fit iWin~^ Ut ob-peto fi* ipprto. (4) iV in m convertlte Ante b vel ante p. Ut cbn-btbb fit cdm-btbd> Ut in-plico fit irn-pltcd. (5) Alia alia? transferunt, Qua* relatu longa sunt ; Unum hoc notandum do, Ab-fcro fit cmftf% 9 Ab-fugio fit attfi^ft). 65 SYNTAXIS MINOR, IN TIRUNCULOKUM GRATIAM CONCINNATA. § 93. A. I. Adjectiva, Participia, et Pronomina cum Sub- stantivis suis genere, numero, et casu concordant: ut. Nullus ad amissas ibit amicus opes, 1. Substantivum per ellipsin intelligitur : ut, Laborem plerique fugiunt. (supple homines.) 2. Neutra Adjectiva Substantivorum vice funguntur : ut, Omnium rerum mors est extremum. II. Verbum finitum concordat cum Nominativo numero et persona : ut, Omnia vitia contra naturam pugnant. 1 Aliquando Infinitivus, vel Locutio aliqua, pro Nominativo ponitur ut, Non est mentiri meum. Incertum est qudm longa vita futura sit. 2. Nominativus Pronominum raro exprimitur : ut, Nitimur in vetitum semper cupimusque negata. Nisi distinctioni vel emphasi inserviat : ut, Ego reges ejeci : vos tyrannos introduoti*. 8. Impersonalia Nommativum non habent expressum : ut, Tcedet ipsum vehementerque pcemtet. •4* Person* Verbi sum saepe intelliguntur : ut. Nihil bonum nisi quod honestum. (supple •§/.) SYNTAXIS MINOR. t>7 &. Infinitivus interdum Nominativo postponitur : ut, Turn pins JEneas humeris abscindere vestetn. 6. Plerumque autem Infinitivus Accusativo postponitur, praecedentc Verbo finito . ut, Tradunt Homerum ccecum fuisse. "HI. Relativum cum Antecedente concordat genere, numero, et persona ; casu autem construitur cum sua sen- tentia : ut, Ea est jucundissima amicitia, quam similitudo morum conjugavit. B. 1. Substantivum, forma sed non sensu singulars saepe habet Vertoum, Adjectivum, vel Relativum plurale : ut, Pars epulis onerant mensas. Subeunt Tegecea juventus Auxilio tardi. Q. Duo vel plura Nomina singularia habent plerumque Verbum, -Ad- jectivum, vel Relativum plurale : ut, Veneno absumpti sunt Hannibal et Philopamien. t. Verbum plurale cum Nominativo dignioris persona?, Adjectivum vero vel Relativum cum Substantivo dignioris generis, fere concordat. b t Prima persona dignior est quam secunda, secunda quam tertia : ut, Si tu et Tuttia valetis, ego et Cicero calemus. •B. In rebus animatis dignius est masculinum genus quam femininum : ut, Pater mihi et "nater mortui sunt. d. In rebus inanimis Adjectivum vel Relativum saepissime erit in neutro genere : ut, Divitice, decus, gloria, in oculis sita sunt. 8. Verba Copulativa, sum, Jlo, videor, vocor, cum siaii- libus, sive finiti modi, sive infiniti, eundem habent utrinque casum : ut, Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus. Begins agnoscor per rata signa puer Vobi& licet esse beatis OS SYKTAXIS MTSOR. 4. Verbum, inter duos Nominativos positum, interdum cum posteriore solo concordat : ut, Arnantium irce amoris integratio est. 8. Relativum, inter duo Substantiva ejusdem rei collocatum, cum po- steriore solo saspc concordat : ut, Thebce, quod Bveotia caput est. 6. Substantivo, Pronomini, et interdum Sententiae, ap- poni potest Substantivum ejusdem rei in ecdem casu : ut, Effodiuntur opes, irritamenta malorum. JVos consules desumus. Cogitet oratorem institui, rem arduam. 7. Cum duo Substantiva diversarum rerum concurrunt, alterum in Genitivo ponitur : ut, Recubans sub teg mine fagi. § 9 4 C. I. Verba Transitiva regunt Accusativum pro- pioris Objecti: ut, Sperne voluptates. Imprimis venerare Deum. 1. Verba quaedam Neutra et Passiva Accusativum admittunt suae operationis: ut, Duram servit servitutem. Claudius aleam hisit. 2. Verba quasdam, rogandi praesertim et docendi, duplicem habent Ac- cusativum : ut, Pacem te poscimus omnes. Quid nunc te, asine, litter as doceam ? a. Plurima ex his in Passiva Voce retinent Accusativum rei : ut, Motus doceri gaudet Ionicns. 3. A?cusa f 4vus Respectus Graeco more subjicitur turn Verbis Neutria et Passivis, turn Adjectivis : ut, Micat auribus et tremit artus. Inficitur teneras tota rubore genaB Nudce sunt brachia. SIX TAXIS MINOR. t& 4. Accusativum regunt hse Przepositiones : Ante, apua\ ad, adversus, Circum, cir^a, citra, cis, Contra, inter, erga, extra, Infra, intra, juxta, ob, Penes, -pone, post, et prater, Prope, propter, per, secundum- Supra, versus, ultra, trans; His super, subter, addito, Et in, sub, si fit motio. II. Vocativus, Appellati casus, regitur ab Interjectione vel expressa, vel intellecta : ut, Fill \elojlli. 1. tnterjectiones en et ecce regunt Accusativum atque Nominativum : o, ah, heu, hem, proh, Accusativum, Nominativum, et Vocativuni t ut, En miser um hominem I Ecce nova turba atque rixa 1 Heu miserande puer ! Heu vanitas humana ! Proh Deum atque hominum fidem Proh sancte Juppiter / 2. Dativum regunt hei et vce : ut, Hei misero mihi ! Vce tibi, causidice / 111. Omnia fere Adjectiva et Verba, item Adverbia et Sub- stantia, regunt Dativum remotioris Objecti, cujug causa est aut fit aliquid : ut, Non solum nobis divites esse volumus. Mihi istic nee seritur 7tec metitur. Numa virgines Vestce legit, Urbi pater est urbique maritus. a. Ita sum possessive significans Dativum possidentis habet: ut, Est mihi namque domi pater, est injusta noverca. '». Dativum regunt plurima Adjectiva, Adverbia, et Verba, interdum etiam Substantiva, a quibus indicatur Commodum, communication Comparatio, consecratio, Congruentia, consuetudo, Auxilium et aptitudo, Benignitas, vicinitas, Traditio, venia, demonstratio, Promissio, fides, et narratio, Obsequium, imptrium, Et quicquid his contrarium ; Cum nubo, vaco : cetera Jucunditas, afiinitas, t Sub prima stabunt regula. 70 SYNTAXIS MINOIi. Ut, Patriot sit idoneus, utilis agris. Est Jinitimus orator i poeta. Turba gravis pad placidatque inimica rpxutu Congruenter natural vivendum est. Culture patientem commodat aurem. Quod alii donat sibi detrahit. Hoc mihi coujirnwvit et persuasit. Nobis spondet fortuna salutem. Pkilosophia medetur animis. Tibi favemus. lrascor tibi. Victrix causa dtis placuit. sed victa Catorri. Puree pio generi. Anguis Sullat apparuit immalanti. O formose puer, nimium ne crede colon. Imperat aut servit coUecta pecunia cuique. Placitone etiam pugnabis amori ? Venus nupsit Vulcano. Philosophic semper vaco. Nulla Jides regni sociis. 3. Communis, simiiis. proprius, par, atque alienus, Fiuraque, nunc voluere Dativum, nunc Genitivum : ui, Media simillima veris sunt. Deos esse similes tui putas ? Propria est nobis mentis agitatio. Proprium est oratoris ornate dicere. b. Delecto atque juvo, jubeo, rego, latdo, guberno, Accusativo contra regulam junguntur : ut, Multos castra juvant. Tu regere imperio populos, RoJnane, memento. e, Tempero et moderor nunc Dativum nunc Accusativum habent : ut Hie moderatur equos qui non moderabitur ira:. S. Dativum ferme regunt Verba composita cum Adverbiis bene, satis* male ; et cum Praepositionibus, praesertim his : — Ad, ante, ab, Sub, super, ob, In, inter, de, Con, post, et pra, ut, Ceteris satisfacio semper ; mihi nunquam. Sicilia quondam Italia adhtpsit. Gigantes bellum diis intuhrunt. Andtum ova gallinis satpk supponimut. a. Multa ex his variant constructionem : ut, ITehetii retiquos Gallos virtute praeedunt* In amort hac insunt vitia. C1NTAXIS MINOR. 71 S. l>ativus A p;ent is sequitur Verbalia in bilis, et Gerundivum in dus j interdum Participia perfecta ; rard Verba Passiva : ut, Mult is Hie bonis Jiebilis occidit. Restat Chremes qui mihi exorandus est. Magttus civis obit et formidatus Othoni. Barbarus hie ego sum, quia non intelligor uUi. m. Verba et Participia Passiva plerumque habent Ablativum Agents cum Praepositione a vel ab : ut, Laudator ab his, culpatur ab Mis. Mors Crassi est a multis defleta. 4. Dativus Propositi additur Verbo sum et multis aliis, vel pro No- minativo vel pro Accusativo : ut, Exemplo est magni formica laboris. Nuchum amisi ; reliquit pignori putamina a. Saepe duplex admittitur Dativus : ut Exitio est avidum mare nautis. IV. Genitivus Possessors sequitur omnia fere Substantiva, ueena* Verba sum, facio, fio, per ellipsin Substantivi : ut, Singulorum opes sunt divitice civitatis. Omnia, qua, mnlieris fuerunt, viri fiunt. Scipio Hispaniam Romance ditionis fecit. 1. Est Impersonale praeponitur Genitivo, si intelligitur Indoles, indicium, Munus aut ojficium. ut, Cujusvis hominis est errare. Improbi hominis est mendacio fallere. Est adolcscentis mnjores natu vereri. 2. Fit etiam ellipsis aliorum Nominum ante Genitivum : ut, Hectoris Andromache, (supple uxor.) Deiphobe Glauci. (supple jilia. ) Ventum erat ad Vestce. (supple templum.^ Hvjus video Byrrhiam. (supple servum.) 3. Genitivus Personalis in Possessivo Pronomine late us redpit alteruia Genitivum sibi concordantem : at, Respublica med unius operd salva erat. Nostros vidisti fientis ocellos. 4. Genitivus Qualitatis sequitur Substantiva : ut, Ingenui vultus puer ingetiuique pudoru. Qualitas etiam in Ablativo ponitur : ut, Senex promissa barbd, horrenti capiflo. 72 SYNTAXIS MINOR. 5. Vocabula Partitiva, Numeralia, Comparativa, et Superlativa re>runt Genitivum, quocum genere concordant : ut, Multcc harum arborum med ipsius manu sunt satct. Utroque vestrum detector Sequimur te, sancte deorum. Sulla centum viginti suorum arnisit. Major Neronum. 'iallorum fortissimi. Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapiU Minime omnium'. $. Hi Genitivi, gentium, terrarum, aliique, sequuntur Adverbia hue* "dt quv, ubi, similia : ut, Migrandum aliqud terrarum arbitror. 7. Quantitatem significantia Adverbia et Substantiva, item Neutra Ad- jectiva ac Pronomina, Genitivum regunt : ut, Satis eloquentice, sapiential parum. Justitia nihil expetit pramii. Aliquid pristini roboris conservaU Quantum nummorum, tantum jidei. 8. Genitivum yegunt Verbalia in ax, Participia quasdam adjective posita, et Adjectiva significantia Notitiam, curam, et cupiditatem, Memoriam, metum, crimen, po- testatem, JEt qua: contrario sensu stant Poetae multa alia dant : ut, Tempus edax rerum. Animus alieni appetens, sui profusus. Nescia mens hominum est fati. Ontnes immemorem benejicii oderunU Fraterni sanguinis insons. Ira est impotens sui. O seri studiorvm. O Verba quaedam accusandi, absolvendi, damnandi t monendi, regunt Geni- tivum rei : ut, Cvndeninamus haruspices stultitioe. lies adversa admonent nos religionum. i u. Memini, recordor, reminiscor, obliviscor, nunc Genitivum regunt, nurw Accusativum: ut, Jubet mortis te meminisse Deug. Dulces moriens reminiscitur Aigos. 1 1 Misceor, miseresco, Gcnitivo junguntUT : Utt Nil nostn miserere SYNTAXJS MINOR. 73 V. Adjectiva, Verba, et aliquando Substantiva, admittunt Ablativum significantem causam, vel instrumentum, vel mod urn, vel materiam, vel respectum, vel limita- tionem qualemcunque : ut, Cceptis immanibus effera Dido. Oderunt peccare mall formidine pcence. Hi jaculis, illi certant defendere saxis. Injuria jit duobus modis, vi aut fraude. Animo constamus et corpore. Ennius ingenio maximus, arte rudis. Mardonius natione Medus. Non grandis natu est, sed tamenjam cetate provectus, 1. Fitngor,frucr, utor, vescor, Ablativum regunt ; potior, Ablativum vei Genitivum: ut, Fungar vice cotis. Cilm victoria posset uti, frui maluit. Numidce ferind came vescebantur, Auro vi potitur. Romani signorum potiti sunt, 2. Acijectiva et Verba, qua? ad copiam egestatemve pertinent, Ablativum regunt ; multa etiam Genitivum : ut, Amor et melle et felle est fecundissimus* Numquam animus motu vacuus est. Turpe est diffiuere luxurid. Vacare culpa maximum est solatium. Dives opum, dives pictai vestis et auri. Mancipiis locuples eget ceris Cappadocum rex* H(£ res vita me saturant. 3. Opus et usus Ablativum regunt : ut, Ubi res adsunt, quid opus est verbis ? Usus est jilio viginti minis. 4. Adjectiva, dignus, indignus, praditus, fretus, contentus, item Verbum dignor, Ablativum regunt : ut, Dignum laude virum Musa vetat mori. Lentulus est singulari modestid prceditus. Haud equidem tali me dignor honore. 5. AWativus Pretii sequitur Verba et Adjectiva signi6cantia emp» tionem, venditionem, vel cestimationem : ut, Ego spem pretio non emo. Plurimus auro venit honos. Muitorum sanguine victoria sietit. Quod nan opus eat, owe carum est. *74 SYNTAXIS MINOR. a. Pe/ Ellipsin usurpantur, omissa voce pretio, Ablativi, "ill, parvo minimo, nimio, magno, plurimo, duplo, et dimidio} ut, Parvo fames constat, magno fastidium. b. fl£stimatio rei plerumque Genitivum habet, praesertim ellipticos illos, magni, parvi, minimi, pluris, atque plurimi : ut, Sapiens dolorem nihili facit. Vbluptatem virtus minimi facit Pluris est oculatus testis unus quam auriti decern, e. Tarn Pretium quam iEstimationem significant, pluris, minoris, tanti, (juanti, maximi : ut, Emit hortos tanti qitanti Pythius voluit. 6. Ablativus Differentiae jungitur Adjectivis, Adverbiis, et Verbis com- parative et superlativae significationis : ut, Sol multis partibus major est quam luna. A Cynicis tunica distantia dogmata, a. In primis Ablativi elliptici : Altera, hoc, eo, quo, Dimidio, duplo, quanta, tanto, Nihilo et nimio, Paullo, multo, aliquanto : ut, Eo gravior est dolor, quo culpa major. Tanto pessimus omnium poeta, Quanto tu optimus omnium patronus. 7. Ablativus Comparationis regitur a Comparativis, sive Adjectivis, sive Adverbiis : ut, Viliu8 argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. Puto mortem dedecore leviorem. a. Quam eleganter omittitur post plus, amplius, minus : ut. Plus quingentos colaphos inf regit mihi. 8. Ablativum regunt ha? Praepositiones : A f ab, absque, coram, de, Palam, clam, cum, ex, et e, Sine, te.nus, pro, et pra : His subter, super, addito. Et in, sub, si fit static a. Prapositio in Compositione eundem nonnunquam casum regit, quern et extra Compositionem regebat : ut Detrudunt naves scopulo. Te nunc aUoquor, Africane. b. Verba discedendi, separandi, arcendi, removendi, et simiiia, omissi quoque Praepositione, regunt Ablativum : ut, Cedes coemptis saltibus et domo. Populus Athentensis Phocionem patrtd pepulit. SYNTAXIS MINOR. 76 C Hue refer Ablativum post Verba et Participia Originis, qualia sunt, natus, prognatusy satus, creatus, ortus : ut, Atreus Tantalo prognatus, Pelope natus. Sate sanguine divunu d. Tenus vel Genitivum pluralem vel Ablativum regit, et post suum Casum ponitur: ut, Crurnm tenus a mento palearia pendent, Antiochus Tauro tenus regnare jussus est. 4. Cum ita subjungitur casibus Pronominum Personalium, et plerum- que Relativi, ut ex duobus vocibus una fiat : ut, mecum, tecum, tecum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quicum vel quocum, quibuscum. 9. Substantivum et Participium conjunctim ponuntur in Ablativo. quern Absolutum vocant: ut, Regibus exactis consules creati sunt. Casare venturo, Phosphore, redde diem. Pereunte obsequio imperium etiam intercidit a. Absolute etiam ponitur Substantivum cum Si!bstantivo vel Adjective, ubi intelligitur Participium existendi: ut, Nil desperandum est, Teucro duce et auspice Teucro. Jamque cinis, vivis fratribus, Hector erat. § 95. D I. 1 . Definitio Temporis in Ablativo pc fcur, si rogatur quando vel intra quantum tempus : ut, Hieme omnia bella conquiescunt. Quicquid est, biduo sciemus. 2. In definiendo Tempore multus est Praepositionum usus : ut, Sol binas in singulis annis reversiones facit. De die. (id est, ante Jinem diei.') De node, (id est, ante Jinem noctis.) De multd node, (id est, multo ante Jinem noctis.) Sub vesperum. (id est, uppropinquante vespero.) Diem ex die expecto. 3. Quanto tempore abhinc, ante* vel pdst, interdum per Ablativum, ro- terdum per Accusativum dicitur : ut, Comitia jam abhinc triginta diebus erant habita. Hoc factum est ferme abhinc biennium. 4. Duratio temporis, ubi rogatur quamdiu, frequentius iu Accusative) punitur, rarius in Ablativo : ut, Pericles quadraginta annos prcefuit Athenh. Imperium Assyrii mille trecentis annis tenuere. <0 SYNTAXIS MINOR. II. 1. Locus, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur itt Ablativo, vel sine Praepositione, vel longe frequentius cum Praeposit'one in : ut. P>am forte" Via Sacra. In Lemno uxorem ducit, 2. Oppidi nomen, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur in Ablativo, modo sit vel teniae Declinationis, vel pluralis Numeri : ut, Alexander Babylone mortuus est. Philippus Neapoli est, Lentulus Puteolis, Thebis nutritus an Argis. 3 &jd in Genitivo ponitur, si et Deelinacionis est primae vel secunda et singularis Numeri : ut, Quid Roma faciam ? mentiri nescio. Is habitat Mileti. 4. Loci nomen a Praepositione fere regitur post Verbum motus : ut, Profectus est in Galliam. Ab Europd petis Asiam. b. Oppidi nomen, ad quod itur, in Accusativo sine Praepositione fer£ ponitur : ut, Regulus Carthaginem rediit. 6, Oppidi nomen, ex quo itur, in Ablativo sine Proposition** fere ponitur; ut, Demaratus fugit Corintho. 7 Sed et Oppida saepe capiunt, et alia Nomina omittunt Praepositionem post Verbum motus : ut, A Brundisio nulla Jama venerat. Pars Scythiam et rapidum Cretan veniemus Oaxen, 8 Humus, domus, et rus oppidorum constructionem imitantur : ut, Cadmus spargit humi, mortalia semina, dentes. Parvi sunt f oris arma, nisi est consilium domi. Ite domum saturai, venit Hesperus, ite capella. Video rure redeuntem senem. III. 1. Spatium Distantias frequentius in Accusativo, interdam in Abla- tivo ponitur : ut, Aheram ab Amann iter unius diet. JEsculapii templum quinque millibus passuum ab Epidaum distui. 9. Spatium Progressions in Accusativo ponitur : utt Millia turn pransi tria repimus. SYNTAX1S MINOR. 3. Spatium Dimensionis frequentissime in Accusative interdum Ablativo, interdum in Genitivo ponitur: ut, Rrant muri Babylonis ducenos pedes alt's jLengum sesquipede, latum pede. Areas latas pedum denum jacito. § 96. E. I. 1. Libet, licet, liquet, et pluaque Impersonal!*, reguut Da- tivum : ut, Ne libeat tibi quod non licet Scevis inter se convenit tirsis. 2. JHget, pudet, pcenitet, tcedet atque miseret, regunt Accusativum Peraunaj cum Genitivo Rei, vel cum Infiintivo: ut, Miseret te aliorum : tui te nee miseret, nee pudet. Me civitatis morvm piget tadetque. Eos partim scelerum. partim ineptiarum pocnitet. Quern poznitet peccasse> pceni est innoceiis. 3* Delectat, juvat, decet, dedeceU oportet, Accusativum capiunt: ut, Mejuvat in prima coluisse Helicona juve?itd. Oratorem irasci minime decet. Legem brevem esse oportet. 4. Pcrtinet, attinet, Prsepositicnem ad cum Accusativo sumunt : ut, Ad rempublicam pertinet, me conservari. Profundat, perdat, pereat, nihil ad me attinet, 5. Interest et refert Genitivum admittunt : ut, Interest omnium rectd facer e. Refert compositionis, quce quibus anteponas. 6. Cum his Verbis junguntur, loco Pronominum Personalium, Ab- lativi feminini, med, tud, sua, nostra, vestrd, subaudita voce re : ut, Et tud et med interest te valere. Quid refert lued, cui serviam ? 7. Adduntur his Verbis Genitivi JEstimationis, tanti, quanti, magni, parvi, pluris : ut, Utriusque nostrum magni interest, ut te videam. Hoc non pluris refert qudm si imbrem in cribrum geras. 8. Verba Neutra in Passiva Voce impersonaliter usurpantur pro quibus* iibet personis : ut, Ab omnibus reclamatum est. (scil. omnes reclamdmnt.) Quid ayitur ? statur (^scil. stciur a nobis, sive stamus. 7S SYNTAXIS MINOR. II. 1. Activa seiitentia fere omnis ita in Passivam convert! potest, ut Nominativus Activa? sententia? fiat in Passiva Ablativna Agentis. (A.) Si Activa? sententia? Verhum Accusativum habet propioris Objecti, Verbura in Passiva personale erit, Accusativo Activa? in No minativum Passiva? transeunte : ut Act. Egregii consul rem gessit. Pass. Egregii ab consule res gesta est. (B.) Sin minus, Verbum Passiva? impersonate erit, et vei sine casa stabit, vel eundem casum reget, quern in Activa regebat : ut. Act. Hostes constanter pugnabant. Pass. Ab hostibus constanter pugnabatur. Act. Medicinal nos indigemus. Pass. Medicines a nobis indigetur. 2. Ubi nihil ambigui esse potest, supprimitur Ablativus Agentis post Im personalia Passiva: ut, Itur in antiquum silvam. 3. Hinc apparet, eosdem casus a Passivis Verbis regi, atque ab Activis, praterquam unum Accusativum propioris Objecti. 4 Vapub, veneo, exulo, liceo, fio, cum aliis quibusdam, vi Passiva con- struuntur : ut, Testis ab reofustibus vapulavit. Malo a cive spoliari t quam ab hoste vinire. Torqueor, infesto ne vir ab hoste cadaU §97 F. I. Infinitivus cum Gerundiis et Supinis Substantivum Verb! efficit. 1. Infipitivus multis Verbis ac Participiis adjungitur et poetice* Ad- jectivis : ut, Invidere non cadit in sapientem. Videor pios errare per lucos. Solent diu cogitare qui magna volunt gerere. Et cantors pares et respondere parati. 2. Pro A'jcusativo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in dam post Pr»- positiones: ut, Breve tempus satis est longum ad bene vivendum. Mores puerorum se inter tulendum detegunt. SYNTAXIS MINOR. 79 5. Pro Genitivo ponitur Gerundium in di post Adjectiva et Substaiv tiva: ut Cupidus sum satisfaeiendi reipublicce. Thucydides omnes dicendi artificio vincit. 4. Pro Dativo ponitur Gerundium in do post Adjectiva et Verba nonnulla : ut, Crassu8 disserendo par esse turn potuit. 5. Pro Ablativo ponitur Gerundium in do Causam, Instrumentum, aut Modum significans, vel cum Praepositionibus ab, de % ex, in, cum : ut, Nihil agendo homines male facere discunt. Jovem ajuvando nominamus. 6. Gerundia Active significant: si vero Transitiva sunt, eorum con structio Passive repraesentari potest, imd frequentius reprse- sentatur, per Participium in dus, quod inde Gerundivi nomen accipit. 7. Gerund iva constructio ejusmodi est, ut Substantivum in Gerundii casum trahatur, cum quo concordet Gerundivum : ut, E terra, ignem elicimus ad colendos agros. Occasio videbatur rerum novandarum. 8. Ad Necessitatem Passive significandam Gerundivum in Neutre Genere impersonaliter adhibetur : ut, Civium bonis est a vobis consulendum. Orandum est ut sit mens sana in corpore sano, I I. I. Supinum in urn postponitur, ut Accusativus, Verbis motum sig- nificantibus : ut, Speetatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsce. Scitatum oracula Phasbi mittimus. 2. Supinum in u postponitur, ut Ablativus Respectus, turn multis Adjectivis, turn Substantivis fas, nefas, opus: ut, Nil dictu foedum visuque hcec limina tangat, Intra qua puer est. Ecce (nefas visu) serpens altaribus exit. III. Participia, Gerundia, et Supinum in urn, regunt casus suoruu Verborum ; ut, Ausi omnes immane nefas, ausoque potiti. § 98. G. 1. Neutra Adjectiva utriusque Numeri ponuntur interduin Adverbialiter, praesertim apud poetas: ut, Serviet cbternum qui parvo nesciet uti. Asper, acerba tuens, retro rtdit. HU SYNTAXIS MINOR. 2. Conjunctiones Sociativa? et Dissociativae similes Casus, Tempore connectunt : ot, Mlraiur portas strepitumque et strata viarunu Virtus nee eripi nee surripi potest. Nisi alia constructionis ratio ijitercedat. Modos, et H. 1 Ne", prohibitiva Conjunctio, Imperativo vel Subjunctivo Morio jungitur: ut, A T e qua meis esto dictis mora, Ne can/eras cvlpam in me. Subjunctivum exigunt h.e Conjunctiones : Ut (that) Ne (lest, that — not) Quo (in order that) Quominus (but that) Quin (but that) Qmtm (since) Licet "] Quamvis L (although) Ut \ (I wish that) 3. Subjunctivum vel Indicativum pro re nata capiunt hae Conjuncti- on* vided that") (as if) } ones Quum Ubi I (when) Ut Dum Donee S- (until) Quoad J Quoties (as often as) Simul ac (as soon as) Ante-quam \ fore Pmus — quam J v Post — quam (after that) Si (if) Nisi (unless) Etsi "J Etiamsi I (although) Tametsi I Indicativum plerumque capiunt hae Conjunctiones, nisi ratio loci Subjunctivum postulet : Quod (that, because) Quia (because) Quoniam (since) Quando (when, since) Siquidem (inasmuch as) Ut (from the time when) Dum "j Donee i- (whilst, as long as) Quoad J Quanquam (although) 5. Quamvis cum Indicativo reperiiur apud historicos et poetas: ut, Quamvis ingenio non valet,, arte valet, 6. Relativum, qui, qua, quod, Subjunctivum regit, ubi signifieat quum, quamvis, ut, vel talis ut: ut, Miseret tut me, qui hunc facias inimicum tibi. Litems misi quibus et placarem eum et monerem, Est qui vinci possit. l&uis est qui non oderit protervam pueritiam 9 SYNTAXIS MINOR. 8i 7 Pronominibus et Particulis interrocandi, subordinate positie, Sub- junctivus additur ut, Ipse quis sit t utrum sit, an non sit, ia quoque riesctt, Talia sunt : Quis, quantus, qualis, qui, quot, quotus, uncle, ubi, quantity Quam, quamobrem, quare, cur, quornodo, nuni, n£, ut, an % utrum. 3. Kelativum vel Conjunctio, quum subordinatur Innnitivo vel Sub- junctive Subjunctivum regit : ut, Cazsar ad me scripsit, gratissimum sibi esse quod quieverira. Molior ut Cccsar mihi concedat ut absim, quum aiiquid in tten.itn contra Cnceum agatur. 9. Conjunctio intelligitur aliquando : ut, Philosophic servias oportet. (supple ut. ) Quceram justum sit necnepoema. (supple utrum ) Partem opere in tanto, sineret dolor, lcare, haberes. (supple si.) Naturam expellas furco., tamen usque recvrreL (sTipple et£i* ) 82 FIRST RULES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING; FOR THE USE OP BEGINNERS. § 99. A. As every independent Sentence must have L A Verb in a Proper Mood, expressed or understood , II. A Subject in the Nominative Case, expressed or un- derstood; with which the Verb agrees (see § 101.): •So observe more particularly : (a) A Substantive may have any of these Adjuncts * (1) Adjectives agreeing with it; (2) Substantives in apposition to it; (3) A Genitive governed by it; (4) A Preposition and Case depending on it. (b) An Adjective may have any of these Adjuncts: (I ) An Adverb qualifying it ; (2) Cases governed by it ; i'S) A Preposition and Case depending on it. (e) A Verb may have any of these Adjuncts : (1) An Adverb qualifying it; (2) Cases governed by it ; (3) Prepositions (with their Cases) depending on it; (4) An Infinitive depending on it. S, Therefore, in order to construe a simple Sentence : I. Find its Verb, which must be in a Proper Mood. Obs. If no such Verb appear, Sst or sunt is probably understood. H. Find its Subject, which will be a Nominative Case of the same Number and Person as the Verb, answer- ing the question who or what ? FIRST RULES OP CONSTRUING AND PARSING. 83 Obs. 1. If no such Nominative appear, the Pronoun agreeing with the Verb must generally be understood as the Sub- ject. Obs. 2. If an Adjective appear in the Nominative, but no Substantive, a Substantive with which it agrees is generally supplied in English : usually man or men, if the Adjective is Mascu- line ; thing or things, if it is Neuter. TL Find the Adjuncts of the Subject, if any. IV. Find the Adjuncts of the Verb, seeing first if it has an Adverb. Obs. In order to find its other Adjuncts, see whether the Verb is Copulative or not. If Copulative, the chief Adjunct will be a Predicate Substantive or Adjective. If not Copulative, the Adjuncts, if any, will be some of those above-mentioned (c). See § 101. V. Having done this, construe into English first the Subject with its agreeing Adjective, and their Ad- juncts ; then the Verb with its Adverb ; then its other Adjuncts. Note. Generally a Simple Sentence contains only one Verb of a Proper Mood : a Compound Sentence contains two or more such Verbs. But, when a Verb is followed by an Accusative and Infinitive, the Sentence is compound. Obs. A Vocative Case, with its Adjuncts, may be construed at the be- ginning of the Sentence, or in some other convenient place. § 100. Observe the following Rules for Parsing the words of a Sentence, whether in writing or by mouth. State what Part of Speech any word is, and mention, if {Its Case — Number — Nom.Sing. — Geni- tive Termination — Declension — Gender — Word it agrees with or is governed by. Give the Rule for its Gender, if desired, from the Accidence : and the Rule for its agreement or government, from the Syntax. Decline it, if desired, through both Numbers. Obs. It is useful, with a Substantive, to decline the Adjective Pronoun /news, in order to show the Gender. Thus, when required to decline ager, afield, say — 84 FIRST RULES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING. Siyig. Plur. Nom. Ager meus, my field Agri mei, my fields Gen. Agri mei, of my field Agrorum meorum, of my B leldx Dat. Agro meo, to my field Agris meis, to my fields Ace. Agrum meura, my field Agros meos, my fields Voc. Ager mi, my field Agri mei, my fields Abl. Agro meo, by my field Agris meis, by my fields And in like manner — Mensa mea, my table. Opus meum, my work, &c. &c. fits Case — Gender — Number — Nom. (2) An Adjective,-! Sing.— What declined like?— What it ^ agrees with ? Decline it, if required. {Its Person — Tense — Mood — Voice — Verb it comes from — Kind of Verb — Conjugation — What Nom. it agrees with? Conjugate it, if required, according to § 44. Give the Rule, if required, for its Perfect and Supine ; and the Syntax Rule for its construction. {Tense — Voice — Verb it comes from — Kind of Verb — Conjugation — What go- verned by ? cs „ . \ Verb it comes from, &c, &c. Diipme, J ' ' Conjugate and give Rules for b, and c. as for a. ' Case — Gender — Number — Nom. Sing. — Tense — Voice — Verb it comes from — Kind of Verb — Conjugation — What it agrees with? Decline. Conjugate, and give Rules, as above, (2) (3) a, 14) Pronoun Re f^ nat Antecedent? — How it agrees * ' i ,- < with its Antecedent? — What Case?— lative, ^ Why? Obs. Personal Pronouns follow the rules of Substantives Pos- sessive those of Adjectives : Demonstrative Pronouns may be used either as Substantives or Adjectives. (5) Adverb, What word it qualifies ? d. Participle, FIRST RULES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING. 85 (6) Preposition, What word it governs ? Note. When the learner is somewhat advanced, he must also state, in parsing, the derivation and composition of words, the govern- ment of Moods, &c. &c. Example. — It is required to construe and parse the words : Ad firmandum corpus multum conducit tempestiva animi remissio, quae negligi non potest impune. 1. These words contain two connected simple sentences, or one compound sentence. (1) Verb of first sentence is conducit (Third Pers. Sing.> (2) Subject Nom. of first sentence is remissio. (3) Adjuncts to the Subject are, a. Agreeing Adjective, tempestiva. b. Genitive Case, animi. (4) Adjuncts to the Verb are, a. Adverb, multum. b. Preposition with Case, ad firmandum corpus (1) Verb of second sentence is potest. (2) Subject Nomin. of second sentence is quae. (3) Adjuncts to the Subject quae, none. (4) Adjuncts to the verb are, a. Adverb, non. b. Infinitive, negligi. c. Adverb, impune. 2. Construe the words in this order : Tempestiva remissio | animi, | quae | non potest | negligi Seasonable relaxation of-mind, which can-not be-omilted impune, | conducit multum | ad firmandum corpus. with-impunity, conduces much to strengthening the-body 3. Parse thus, taking the words in order of construing : (1.) Tempestiva. Adjective. Nom. Fern. Sing, from tempestivus like bonus. Agrees with remissio by Rule § 93. A. I. (2.) Remissio. Substantive. Nom. Sing. Third Decl. Fern. (onis). Subject of the Verb conducit. Rule for its Gender % 73. (a) (2). S6 FIRST BUXES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING. (3.) Animi. (4.) Quae. (5.) Non. '6.) Potest. <7. ) NegligL (8.) Impune. (9.) Conducit. (10.) Multum. (11.) Ad. (12.) Firmandum, ( I % ) Corpus. We. Substantive. Gen. Sing, from animus (i) mind. Second Decl. Masc. Governed by remissio by Rule § 93. B. 7. Rule for Gender, § 72. Relative Pronoun. Agrees with Antecedent re- missio, being Fem. Sing. Third Pers. Rule, § 93. III. Nominative to the Verb potest. Adverb. Qualifies the Verb potest. Verb. Third Pers. Pres. Indie. Act. from the Irregular Neuter Verb possum (potes, &c. ), § 61. Agrees with its Nom. quae by Rule f 93. II. Verb. Pres. Infin. Pass, from the Transitive Verb negligo (is), I-neglect. Third Conj. Is governed by the Verb potest by Rule § 97. F. I. 1. Conjugate negligo, negligis, neglexi, &c. Rule for Preterperfect and Supine, § 91. 4. N. § 82. (6). Adverb Qualifies the Verb negligi (or po- test). Verb. Third Pers. Pres. Indie. Act. from the Neuter Verb conduco (is), I-conduce. Third Conj. Agrees with its Nominative Case remis- sio by Rule § 93. II. Conjugate conduco, conducis, conduxi, &c. Rule for Preterperfect and Supine, § 82. (&). Adverb. Qualifies the Verb conducit. Preposition. Governs the Accus. Case corpus. Participle. Ace. Neut. Sing, from firmandus, Part. Gerundive Pass, from the Transitive Verb firmo (as); I- strengthen ; First Conj. Agrees with corpus by Rule § 97. I. 7. Substantive. Ace. Sing, from corpus (oris). Third Decl. Neut. Governed by ad, by Rule § 94. V. 8. Rule for Gender, § 75. (c). Each rule, when required, must be repeated at full : each Sub- stantive, when required, be declined with meus ; and each Verb bt conjugated according to § 44. SYNTAXIS, SIVE SENTENT1ARUM CONSTRUCTIO. PAES I. DE SIMPLICI SENTENTIA. § 101. PnEFATORf Excursion. Syntax teaches the correct arrangement of words in sentences, 'lhe simplest sentence is the Proposition or Enuntiation of a single thought : as, homo est mortalis, man is mortal. The simplest form of Sentence has three members : 1. Subjectum, the Subject; that is, the person, thing, or notion concerning which something is predicated, or declared. 2. Prcedicatum, the Predicate; that which is predicated (prcedicatur'u or declared, concerning the Subject. 3. Copula, or the Link, which shows the connection between the Subject and its Predicate, and so constructs the sentence. (1) The Subject must be a Substantive, or that whicb possesses the force of a Substantive : as homo, man i ego, I ; Gal/us, a Gaul ; err are, to err ; tu, thou. (2) The Predicate, when distinct from the Copula, must be a Substantive, Adjective, Participle, or Adjectival Pronoun ; as, animal, an animal ; mortalis, mortal ; victus, conquered ; noster, ours : or a Preposition with its case (equivalent to a noun) ; as sine vitiis, pro consule. (3) The Copula, when distinct from the Predicate, is generally some finite form of the Verb of being, sum. Examples of Simple Sentences in which the three members are distinct: — SUBJECT. COPULA. PREDICATE. 1. Homines sunt animalia. Men are animals. 2 Ego sum mortalis. I am mortal. 3. GaUi erant victi. The Gauls were .conquered. 4 Errare est nostrum. To err is ours S8 b^NTAXIS, SIVE SUBJECT. COPULA.. PREDICATE. 5. Tu ..... es pro co?i*iue. Th(»u art Proconaui. But, in general, the Predicate and Copula are blended together in one finite Predicative Verb, which is then called the Predicate : as, SUBJECT. PREDICATE. Ego disc-o. I learn (am learning). Homines spira-nt. Men breathe (are breathing). Here, strictly speaking, the crude Forms of the Verbs (disc-, spira-) are the Predicates, and the Endings (-o, -ni), are the Copulas. And, when the Subject is understood from the Ending, a single Verb may be a complete sentence. Thus, the famous despatch of Caesar, Veni, vidi, vici (I came, I saw, I conquered), contains three distinct sentences, each consisting of one word only. Obs. 1. When an Adjective qualifies a Substantive without being joined to it by a Copula, it is said (attribui, attributum esse) to be an Attributive or Epithet. Thus, in the sentence, Vtr bonus laudatur (a good man is praised), bonus is an Epithet ; but in Vir est bonus (the man is good), bonus is the Predicate. Obs. 2. The Infinitive, Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, are called Verbum Infinitum : all the other forms of the Verb, any of which can make a complete sentence, are called Verbum Finitum. Obs. 3. Objectum, the Object, is that person or thing upon which an action is directed : as, Pnrentes amant liber os, where liber os is the Object. Sometimes there are two Objects, a nearer and a remoter : as, Pater librum filio dot ; where librum is the nearer Object, filio the remoter. Obs. 4. Copulative Verbs are those which couple a Subject and a Nominal Predicate. Of these Verbs sum is the chisf : but others also have a Copulative use, as forem, fio, existo, evado, maneo, audio, nascor, videor ; and Passive Verbs of making, naming, declar- ing, choosing, thinking, finding, fyc. : as efficior, appellor^ vocor, nuncupor, dicor, feror, declaror, creor, designor, eligor, inscribor, existimor, putor, credor, agnoscor, habeor, invenior, reperior, §*c. DE CONCORDANTIIS. CONCORDANTIA PRIMA. Adjectivi cum Substantivo. § 102. Regula Generate. — Adjectiva, Participia, et Prono- mina, sive attributa sive praedicata, cum Substaii- tivis suis genere, numtro, et casu concordant : ut> 8ENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 89 Donee erisfelix, multos numerabis amicos ; Nullus ad amissas ibit amicus opes. — Oytdius. Obs. 1. Substantivum per ellipsin intelligitur : ut, Labor em plerique fugiunt. (supple homines.) — Cicero. Comix a Icevd canit, corvus a dextrd. (supple manu.) — Cic. Obs. 2. Neutra Adjectiva Substantive-rum vice fungunturt ut, Omnium rerum mors est extremum. — Cic. Honestum et utile pugnare aliquando videntur. — ClO. Verecundd laxamus seria mensd. — Persius. CONCORDANTIA SECUNDA. Verbi cum Nominativo Suhjecti. § 103. R. G. — Verbum finitum concordat cum Nominativo numero et persona : ut, Omnia vitia contra naturam puynant. — Seneca. Sera nimis vita est crastina. — Martialis. Obs. Aliquando Infinitivus, vel continuata Locutio, vel Advcr- bium cum Genitivo, pro Nominativo ponitur : ut, Non est mentiri meum. — Terentius. Incertum estqudm longa nostrum cujusque vita futura sit. — Cic. Parum in eo putabatur esse animi. — Cic. A. DE ELLIPSI NOMINATIVI. § 104. Obs. 1. Nominativus Pronominum raro exprimitur : ut, Nitimur in vetitum semper cupimusque negata. — Ov ( Obs. ) Nisi distinctioni vel emphasi inserviat : ut, Ego reges ejeci : vos tyrannos introducitis. — Crc Obs. 2. Dicendi, narrandi, et appellandi Verba tertia? per- sonam pluralis Nominativum homines saepe habent intellectum : ut, Quod oiunt, auribus teneo lupum. — Ter. Obs. 3. Impersonalia Nominativum nop habent expres- sum : ut, Tmdet ipsum vehementerque pamilet. — Cic. ( Oc* ) Multa vero, quae Impersonalia vocantur, Nominativura aUquem habent intellectum : ut, Jam advesperascit. ("supple dies.) — Cic. 90 STNTAX1S, SIVE B. DE ELLIP'SI VERBI. § 105. Obs. 1. Person® praesentis Verbi sum ssepe intelliguntur : ut, Nihil bonum nisi quod honestum. (supple est.) — Cic. Obs. 2. Infinitivus interdum Nominative- postponitur : ut, Turn pius ZEneas humeris abscindere vestem. — Virg. (Obs.) Plerumque autem Infinitivus Accusativo postponitur, praecedente Verbo finito : ut, Tradunt Homerum ccecum fuisse. — Cic. CONCORD ANTIA TERTIA. Relativi cum Antecedents § 106. R. G. — Relativum cum Antecedente concordat genere, numero, et persona : casu autem construi- tur cum sua sententia : ut, Ea est jucundissima amicitia, quam similitude* morum conjugavit. — Cic. Obs. 1. Si Sententia pro Antecedente ponitur, Relativum est in neutro genere : ut, In tempore ad earn veni, quod rerum omnium est primum. — Ter. Obs. 2. Interdum Antecedens in possessivo Pronomine in- ciuditur : ut, Omnes laudare for tunas meas Qui natum haberem tali ingenio pr&ditum. (sci- licet, fortunas mei qui.) — Ter. § 107. Nota. — Relativum, Qui, quae, quod, plerumque consider ari debet tan quam positum inter duos casus unius Substan- tivi, sive expresses sive suppressos : cum antecedente conveniet in genere et numero : cum sequente etiam in casu, sicut Adjectivum cum Substantivo. Obs. 1 . Ambo Casus interdum exprimuntur : ut, Erant itinera duo, quibus itineribus exire possent. — C jksar. Obs. 2. Plerumque supprimitur Casus posterior : ut, Animum rege, qui, nisi paret, Imperat. (scilicet qui animus. ) — Horati as. Ifc**. 3. Interdum prior : ut, Sic tibi dent nympha qua levet uwla sitim (scil. undam qua unrfn. ) — Ov. SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT1O. 91 Ob*. 4. Interdum uterque : ut, Sunt quibus in satird videor nimis acer. (scil. homines quibus hominibus. ) — Hor. SUPPLEMENTUM CONCORDANT! ARUM. A. DE SYNESI. § 108. Synesis est ea constructionis ratio, quae ad sensum voeabu lorum, non ad formam, spectat. R. G. I. — Substantivum, forma sed non sensu singulare, saepe habet Verbum, Adjectivum, vel Relativum plurale : ut, Pars epulis onerant mensas. — Virgllius. Clamor inale populi, mirantium quid rei esset. — Livius. Ccesar equitatum pravnittit, qui hostes observent — C^es. R G. II. — Substantivum, forma sed non sensu neutrum vel femi- ninum, interdum habet Adjectivum aut Relativum diversi generis: ut, Capita conjurationis securi percussi sunt. — Liv. Ubi est is scelus, qui me perdidit ? — Ter. Subeunt Tegecea juventus Auxilio tardi. — Statius. b. DE PLURIBUS NOM1NIBUS IN SUBJECTO. § 109. R. G. I. — Duo vel plura Nomina singularia conjuncta habent plerumque Adjectivum, Verbum, vel Relativum plurale : ut, Veneno absumpti sunt Hannibal et PMlopozmen. — Liv. $ U 0. R. G. II. — Si Nomina ilia singularia diversarum sunt personarum vel generum, Verbum plurale cum Nomina- tivo dignioris personam, Adjectivum vero vel Relativum cum Substantivo dignioris generis, fere concordat. (a) Prima persona dignior est quam secunda, secunda quarn tertia : ut, Si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus. — Cic. (b) In rebus animatis dignius est masculinum genus quam femininum: ut, Pater mini et mater rnortui sunt — Ter. (c) In rebus vero inanimis Adjectivum vel Relativum sae- pissime erit in neutro genere : ut, Divitice, decus, gloria, in oculis sita sunt. — Saljlustius. 92 SYNTAXIS, SIVE ( Obs. ) Verbum haud raro cum proximo Substantivo concordat *. ut, Religio et fides anteponatur amicitiai. — Cir. Convicta est Messalina et Silius. — Tacitus. C. DE CONSTRUCTIONS VERBORUM COPULATIVORUM. § 11 L R. G. — Verba Copulativa, sive finiti modi, sive mfiniti, eundem habent utrinque casum : ut, Si spes est expectatio boni, mali expectationem esse necesse est metum. — Cic. Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus. — Hor Regius agnoscor per rata signa puer. — Ov. Vobis licet esse beatis. — Hob. § 112. Obs. 1. Verbum, inter duos Nominativos positum, interdum cum posteriore solo concordat : ut, Amantium irce amoris integratio est. — Ter. Non omnis error stultitia est dicenda. — Cic. Obs. 2. Relativum, inter duo Substantiva ejusdem rei collocatum cum posteriore solo seepe concordat : ut, Animal plenum rationis, quern vocamus hominem. — Cic. Thebce, quod Bceotice caput est. — Liv. D. DE APPOSITIONE. § 113. R. G. — Substantivo, Pronomini, et interdum Sentential apponi potest Substantivum ejusdem rei in eodem casu : ut, Effodiuntur opes, irritamenta malorum. — Ov. Nos consules desumus. — Cic. Cogitet orator em institui, rem arduam. — Cic. Afot — Cum duo Substantiva diversarum rerum concurrunt, alterum in Genitivo ponitur : ut, Recubans sub tegmine fagi. — Virg. DE RECTTONE CASUUM, ACCUSATIVUS. § 114. Accusativus est casus propioris Objecti. R % G. I. — Verba Transitiva regunt Accusativum propioris Objecti: ut, Sperne voluptates. — Hor. Imprimis verier are Deum. — VlEG. Percontatorem fugito. — Hor. SENTENTIARUM CONST RUCTIO. 93 Obs. 1. Verba quaedam Neutra et Passiva Accusativurn admit- tunt suaa operationis : ut, Duram servit servitutem. — Plautus. Claudius aleam lusit. — Suetonius. § 115. Obs. 2. Verba Transitiva, quae in Voce Passiva Copulativa {hint, dupKcem habent Accusativum, unum Objec- tivum, alterum Praadicativum : ut, Ciceronem populus consulem declaravit. — Cic. Hannibal Philippum hostem reddidit Romanis. — Nepos. § 116. Obs 3. Verba qusedam rogandi et docendi duplicem habent Accusativum, unum personam, alterum verb rei : ut, Pacem te poscimus omnes. — Virg. Quid nunc te, asine, litter as doceam f — Cic. Et interdum celo : ut, Ea ne me celet consuefeci Jilium. — Ter. ( Obs. ) Eadem verba in Passiva Voce retinent Accusativum rei : ut, Is primus rogatus est sententiam. — Liv. Motus doceri gaudet Ionicos. — Hor. § 117. Obs. 4. Accusativus Respectus Graeco more subjicitur turn Verbis Neutris et Passivis turn Adjectivis : ut, Micat auribus et tremit artus. — Virg. Inficitur teneras tota rubore genas. — Tibullus. G er manor um femina nudce sunt brachia ac lacertos. — Tac. § 118. B. G. II. — Accusativum regunt hae Praepositiones : Ante, apud, ad, adversus, Circum, circa, citra, cis, Contra, inter, erga, extra, Infra, intra, juxta, ob, Penes, pone, post, et prater, I Prope, propter, per, secundum, Sup?-a, versus, ultra, trans ; His, super, subter, addito, Et in, sub, si fit motio. § 119. R. G. — Vocativus, Appellati Casus, regitur ab Inter- jectione, sive expressa, sive intellecta : ut, O Sol pulcher, O laudande. — Hor. Alme Sol. — Hor. Fill vel OfilL — Ter. Not. — Interjectiones en et ecce regunt Accusativum et Xomiria- tivum ; o, ah, lieu, hem, proh, Accusativum, Nominativum, et Vocativum : ut, En miserum hominem. ! — Cic. Ecce nova turba atque rixa ! — Cic. Heu miserande puer ! — Vtrg. Heu vanitas humana ! — Plinius. Pro h Deum atque hnminum Jidew ! — Cic. 94- SYXTAXIS, SIVE Obe. Dativum regunt hei et v medius : ut, Homini uni animantium luctus est datus. — Plin. Sulla centum viginti suorum amisit. — Eutropius. Sicilia prima omnium nationum provincia est appeU lata. — CiC. Nunc juvenum princeps, deinde future senum, — Ov, Roma regionum Italia media est. — Liv. 3. Comparativa et Superlativa : ut, Major Neronum. — Hor. Gallorum fortissimi sunt Belga?. — CLes. 4. Adverbia Superlativa : ut, Hoc ad te minime omnium pertinet — CiC. 5. Substantiva Partitiva et partitive posita : ut, Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit. — Plin Piscium femince majores quam mares, — Pun. 100 SYNTAXIS, 8IVK § 134. Obs. 1. — Distributionem etiam efficiunt Fraepositiones ex, tn, inter, ante, de : ut, Nihil ex his, quae videmus, manet — Sen. Thales sapientissimus in septemfuit. — Cic. Inter Scythice amnes amcenissimus Borysthenes. — Mela. Ante omnes Turnus pulcherrimus. — Virg. Una de multisfuit in parentem Splendide mendax. — Hor. % 1S5. Obs. 2. — Hi Genitivi, gentium, terrarum, aliique, sequuntur Adverbia localia, hue, eb, quo, ubi, similia : ut, Migrandum aliqub terrarum arbitror. — Cic. Vir bonus, ubicumque erit gentium, a nobis diligetur. — Cic Perseus perfugium sibi nusquam gentium esse ait. — Liv. Huccine rerum venimus? — Pers. § 136. R. G. IV. — Substantiva, Adverbia, item Neutra Adjectiva et Pronomina, Quart titatem significantia, regunt Genitivum rei demensae : ut, Justitia nihil expetit prcemii. — Cic. Satis eloquentice, sapientice parum. — Sall, Aliquid pristini roboris conservat. — Cic. Dimidium facti qui bene ccepit habet. — Hon. Quantum nummorum, tantumfidei. — Juv. § 137. B. R. G. I. — Genitivum Objectivum regunt multa Substantiva, in quibus transitiva quaedam vis est : ut Insitus est menti cognitionis amor. — Cic. Obs. Hie Genitivus aliquando Prgepositionis cum casu vicein occupat: ut, Bellum Helvetiorum. (scil. cum Helvetiis.) — CiES. § 138. R. G. II. Genitivum Objectivum regunt Verbalia in ax, Participia quaedam adjective posita, et Adjectiva significantia Et qua3 contrario sensu stant ; Poetae multa alia dant : Notitiam, curam, et cupiditatem, Memoriam, metum, crimen, po- testatem, ut, Tempus edax rerum. — Ov. Animus alieni appetens, sui profusus. — Sall, Nescia mens hominum estfati. — Virg. Omnes immemorem beneficii oderunt. — ClC. Ira est impotens sui. — Sen SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT1O. 101 Fraterni sanguinis insons. — Ov. O sen studiorum. — Hor. § 139. R. G. III. — Verba qusedam accusandi, convincendi, absolvendi, damna?idi, regunt, cum Accusativo per- sons, Genitivum rei : ut, Cicero Verrem avaritice arguit — CiC. Condemnamus haruspices stidtitice. — CiC. Ne quern innocentem capitis arcessas. — CiC. Obs. 1. Pro hoc Genitivo ponitur Praapositio, prsesertim de % cum suo casu : ut, Accusatur inter sicarios et de veneficiis. — Cic. Obs. 2. Sine Praepositione usurpantur hi Ablativi, crimine, lege, scelere, capite, et alii nonnulli : ut, Themistocles crimine proditionis absens damnatus est. — Nep Legibus ambitus interrogatus pcenas dedit. — Cic. Fulviwn capita anquirendum subclamant. — Liv. Obs. 3. Similiter Verba monendi, cum Accusativo personae, regunt Genitivum rei : ut, Res adversce admonent nos religionum. — Liv. (Obs.) Vel Ablativum cum Pra?positione de : ut, Terentiam de testamento ?noueatis. — Cir. § 140. R. G.IY. — Me?nini, recordor, remi?iiscor / obliviscor 9 nunc Genitivum regunt, nunc Accusativum : ut, Jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. — Mart. Dulces moriens reminiscitur Argos. — ViRG. § 141. R. G, V. — Miser eor, miseresco, Genitivo junguntur; mweror, commiseror, Accusativo : ut, Nil nostri miserere. — Virg. Arcadii, quceso, miserescite regis. — ViRG. Agesilaus commiseratus est fortunam Grcecice. — Nep. § 1 42. Not 1.— Genitivus interdum ponitur post Verba desinendi, potiendi^ regnandi • ut, Desine mollium tandem quereiarum. — Hor. Romani signorum et armorum potiti sunt Sall. Daunus agrestium regnavit populorum. —- Hor. ffaf. e 2. — Rariores sunt Genitivi Causae, Respectus, Propina" tionis: ut, Laudabat letijuvenem. — SiL. Animi pendeo. — Cic. Da noctis media (supple poexdwt ). — Hor. (02 SYNTAXIS, SIVB ABLATIVUS. § 1 43. Ablativus est Casus qui circumstantia actionis definit R. G.I. — Adjectiva, Verba, etaliquando Substantiva, admlt- tunt Ablativum significantem rei aut actionis cau- sam, vel instrumentum, vel rnodum, vel materiam, vel limitationem qualemcunque. § 144. A. Ablativus Causes sequitur Adjectiva, Verba, et praesertim Participia : ut, Cceptis immanibus effera Dido. — Virg. Oderunt peccare mali formidine poence. — Hon. Animus pravis cupidinibus captus, — Sall. § 145. B. Ablativus Instrument! sequitur Verba : ut, Dente lupus, cornu taurus petit. — Hor. Hi jaculis, Mi certant defender e saxis. — Virg. § 146. C. Ablativus Modi plerumque sequitur Verba : ut, Injuria fit duobus modis, vi aut fraude. — Cic. Obs. Persaepe capit Praepositionem cum : ut, Magna cum curd atque diligentid scripsit. — Cic Cum venid f actio, quisquis es, ista leg as. — Ov. § 147. D. (a) Ablativus Materle sequitur Verba constru- endi, consistendi, et similia : ut, Animo constamus et corpore. — Cic. Obs, Vel cum Praepositione ex : ut, Beata vita constat ex rectis actionibus. — Sen. (b) Fungor, fruor, utor, vescor, potior, Ablativum regunt : ut, Fungar vice cotis. — Hor. Cum victoria posset uti, frui maluit. — Florus. Numidce ferina came vescebantur. — Sall. Auro vi potitur. — Virg. 0~bs. Haec Verba antiquitiis Accusativum habebant : ut, Functus est officium boni viri. — Ter. § 148. (c.) Adjectiva et Verba, quae ad copiam egestatem\t\ pertinent, Ablativum regunt; multa etiam Ge- uitivum: ut, SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. W6 Amor et melle etfelle est fecundissimus. — Plaut. Numquam animus motu vacuus est. — CiC. Turpe est diffluere luxurid. — CiC. Vacare culpa maximum est solatium. — CiC. Dives opum, dives pictai vestis et auri. — Virg. Mancipiis locuples eget a?ris Cappadocum rex, — Hor. Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. — Hor. Ha res vitre me saturant. — Plaut. (d) Opus et usus Ablativum regunt : ut, Ubi res adsunt, quid opus est verbis? — Sall. Usus estfilio viginti minis. — Plaut. (e) Dignus, indignus, pr&ditus, fretus, item Verbum dignor, Ablativum regunt : ut, Dignum laude virum Musa vetat mori. — Hor. Lentulus est singulari modes tid praditus. — CiC. Haud equidem tali me dignor honor e. — Virg. $ 149. E. Ablativus Limitations late patet. (a) Ablativus Respectus jungitur prsesertim Adjectivis, item Verbis et Substantivis : ut, Ennius ingenio maximus, arte rudis. — Ov. Oculis captifodere cubilia talpa. — ViRG. Agesilaus fuit claudus altero pede. — Nep. Et corde et genibus tremit. — Hor. Quid hoc homine fades? — Cic. § 150. Obs. Hue referuntur Ablativi illi, domo, natione, numero y similes ; item estate et natu : ut, Domo Carthaginienses sunt. — Plaut. Mardonius natione Medus. — Nep. Non grandis natu est, sed tamenjam atate provectus. — Cic Ennius fuit major natu quarn Plautus et N&vius. — Cic. § 15 1. (b) Ablativus Pretii sequitur Verba et Adjectiva signifieantia emptionem, venditionem, vel cesli- mationem: ut, Ego spem pretio non emo. — Ter. Plurimus auro venit honos. — Propertius. Multorum sanguine victoria stetit. — Liv. Quod non opus est, asse carum est. — bEN. 104 SYNTAXIS, S1VE Obs. 1 Per Ellipsin usurpantur, omissa vocepretio, hi Ablativi, vili, parvo, minimo, nimio, mag~io, plurimo, duplo, et dimidio : ut, Parvo fames constat, mag~io fastidium. — Sen. Obs. 2. JEstimatio rei plerumque Genitivum habet, prsesertim ellipticos illos, magni, parvi, minimi, pluris, atque plu- rimi: ut, Sapiens dolor em nihili facit. — Cic. Voluptatem virtus minimi facit, — Cic. Pluris est oculatus testis unus, quam auriti decern. — Plaut. ( Obs.) Tam Pretium quam ^Estimationem significant, pluris, minoris, tanti, quanta maximi : ut, Emit hortos tanti, quanti Pytktus voluit. — Cic. $ 152. (c) Ablativus Differentiae jungitur Adjectivis, Adver- biis, et Verbis comparative et superlative sig- nificationis: ut, Sol multis partibus major est quam luna. — Cic* A Cynicis tunica distantia dogmata, — Hor. Obs. In primis Ablativi elliptic! : Altero, hoc, eo, quo, Dimidio, duplo, quanto, tanto % Nihilo et nimio, Paullo,multo, aliquanto: ut, Eo gravior est dolor, quo culpa major, — Cic. Tanto pessimus omnium poeta, Quanto tu optimus omnium pair 'onus. — Catul. Nihilo aliter sum atque fui. — Ter. § 153. (d) Ablativus Comparationis regitur a Comparativis, sive Adjectivis, sive Adverbiis. Nota. — Hie Ablativus ponitur pro Conjunetione quam cum Nominativo vel Accusative (1) Pro quam cum Nominativo . ut, Nihil est amabilius virtute. — Cic. Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. — Hor. (2) Pro quam cum Accusativo : ut, Puto mortem dedecore leviorem. — Cic. Neminem Lycurgo utiliorem Lacedamon genuit. — Valerius Maximus. Obs. 1. Quam duobus Comparativis eleganter interponitur : lit, Triumphus Camilli clarior erat quam gratior. — Liv Obs. 2. Quam eleganter omittitur post plus, arnplius, minus : ut, Plus quingentos colaphos infregit mihi. — Ter. 6*8. 3. Comparationi inserviunt etiam Prepositiones ardt, prcecer, supra, pra; ut, SENTENTIARTJM CONSTRUCTIO. 105 Pygmalion, scelere ante alios immanior omnes. — Virq. Crux prceter ceteras altior. — Suet. § 154. R. G. II. — Ablativum regunt hae Prsepositiones . A, ab, absque, coram, de, Palam, clam, cum,ex, et e, Sine, tenus, pro, et prce : His subter, super, addito, Et in, sub, si fit statio. Obs. 1. Praepositio in Compositione eundem nonnunquam Ca- sum regit, quern et extra Compositionem regebat : ut, Detrudunt naves scopulo. — Virg. Te nunc attoquor, Africane. — Cic. Obs, 2. Eleganter iteratur eadem Praepositio : ut, E corpore excedit animus. — Cic. ( 06*. ) Vel importatur nova : ut, Alto defiuxit ab athere tabes. — Lucan. Obs 3. Verba discedendi, separandi, arcendi, removendi, et similiai omissa quoque Praepositione, regunt Ablativum : ut, Cedes coemptis saltibus et domo. — Hor. Populus Atheniensis Phocionem patrid pepulit. — !Nef, (06*.) Hue refer Ablativum post Verba et Participia Originis: ut, Atreus Tantalo prognatus, Pelope natus. — Cic. Sate sanguine divum. — VlRG. Obs. 4. Tenus vel Genitivum pluralem vel Ablativum regit, et post suum Casum ponitur : ut, Crurum tenus a mento palearia pendent — Virg. Antiochus Tauro tenus regnare jussus est. — Cic. Obs. 5. Cum ita subjungitur casibus Pronominum Personalium, et plerumque Relativi, ut ex duobus vocibus una fiat * ut, mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quicum pro quocum, quibuscum. A. DE ABLATIVO ABSOLUTO. § 155. JR. G. — Substantivum et Participium conjunctim ponuntu> in Ablativo, quern Absolutum vocant : ut, Regibus exactis consules creati sunt. — Liv. Ccesare venturo, Phosphor e, redde diem. — Mart. Pereunte obsequio imperium etiam intercidit. — Tac. Obs. 1. Absolute etiam ponitur Substantivum cum Substantivo vel Ad- jective, ubi intelligitur Participium existendi : ut, Nil desperandum est, Teucro duce et auspice Teucro. — Hor. Jamque cinis, vivis fratribus, Hector erat. — Ov. 106 SYNTAX IS, SIVE Obs. 2. Aliquando cum Ablativo Participii absolute ponitur continuata Locutio pro Ablativo Substantivi : ut, Excepto qudd non simul esses, cetera lotus. — Ho a. DE CONSTRUCTION*] TEMPORIS. § 156. It. G. I. — Definitio Temporis in Ablativo ponitur, si rogatur quando vel intra quantum tempus : ut, Hieme omnia bella conquiescunt. — Cic. Quicquid est, biduo sciemus. — Cic. Obs. I. In definiendo Tempore multus est Praspositionum usus : ut, Sol binas in singulis annis reversiones facit. — Cic. De die. (id est. ante finem diei.) — Hor. De node, (id est, ante finem noctis.) — jIor. De multa node, (id est, multo ante finem nodis.) — Cic. Sub vesperum. (id est, appropinquante vespero.) — Cj&s. Diem ex die expecto. — Cic. Obs. 2. Quanto tempore abhinc, ant$ 9 vel pdst, interdum per Ablati- vum, interdum per Accusativum dicitur : ut, Comitiajam abhinc triginta diebus erant habita. — Cic. Hoc factum est ferrne abhinc biennium. — Plaut. R G. II. — Duratio temporis, ubi rogatur quamdiu, frequentiiis in Accusativo ponitur, rarius in Ablativo : ut, Pericles quadraginta annos pra^fuit Athenis. — Cic. Imperium Assyrii mille trecentis annis tenner e. — Just. DE CONSTRUCTIONIBUS LOCI ET SPATIL 157. A. R. G. I. — Locus, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur in Ablativo, vel sine JPraepositione, vel longe frequentius cum Praepositione in : ut, Ibam forte Via Sacra, — Hor. In Lemno uxor em ducit. — Ter. Obt. 1. Oppidi nomen, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur in Ablativo, modo sit vel tertian Declinationis, vel pluralis Nuineri : ut. Alexander Babylone mortuus est. — Cic. Philippus Neapoli est, Lentulus Puteolis. — Cic. Ob§. 2. Sed in Genitivo ponitur, si et Declinationis est primae vel secundag, et singularis Numeri : ut, Quid Romce faciam ? mentiri nescio. — Juv. /* habitat Mileti. — Ter SENTENTIAKUM CONSTRUCTIO. 107 § 158. R. G II. — Loci Nomen a Praepositione fere regitur ] >st Yerbum niotus : ut Profectus est in Galliam. — Cjes. Ab Europdpetis Asiam. — Curtius. Obs. 1. Oppidi nomen, ad quod itur, in Accusativo sine Praepositione fere ponitur : ut, Regulus Carthaginem rediit. — Cic. Obs. 2. Oppidi nomen, a quo itur, in Ablativo sine Praepositione fere* ponitur : ut, Demaratus fugit Corintho. — Cic. Obs. 3. Sed et Oppida ssepe capiunt, et alia Nomina omittunt, Praepo- sitionem post Verba motus : ut, A Brundisio nulla fama venerat, — Cic. Pars Scythiam et rapidum Cretce veniemu* Oaxen.-—\iRG. § 1 b9. Obs. 4. Humus, domus, et rus oppidorum constructionem lmi- tantur: ut, Cadmus spargit humi, mortalia semina, dentes. — Ov. Parvi sunt forts arma, nisi est consilium domi. — Cic. He domum saturce, venit Hesperus, ite capellce. — Virg. Video rure redeuntem senem. — Ter. { 160. B. R. G. I. — Spatium Distantiae frequentiiis in Accusa- tivo, interdum in Ablativo ponitur : ut, Aberam ab Amano iter unius diei. — Cic. ^Esculapii templum quinque millibus passuum ab Epidauro distat. — Liv. R. G. II. — Spatium Progressions in Accusativo ponitur : ut, Millia turn pransi tria repimus. — Hon. R. G. III. — Spatium Dimensionis frequentissime in Accu- sativo, interdum in Ablativo, interdum in Genitivo poni- tur : ut, Erant muri Baby lords ducenos pedes alti. — Plin. Longum sesquipede, latum pede. — Plin. Areas latas pedum denum f actio. — Columella* DE CONSTEUCTIONE VERBORUM IMPERSONALIUM. § 161 R. G. I. — Libet, licet, liquet, et pleraque Impersonulia, regunt Dativum : ut, Ne libeat tibi quod non licet. — Cic. SiBvis inter se convemt ursis. — Juv. 108 SYNTAX1S, SIYK R. G. II. — Piget, pudet, pamitet, tcedet atque miseret, regunt Accusativum Personae, cum Genitivo Rei, vel cum In- finitive-: ut, Miseret te aliorum : tui te nee miseret, nee pudet. — Plaut Me civitatis morum piget tcedetque. — Sale. Eos partim scelerum, partim iueptiarum pcenitet. — Cic. Quern pcenitet peccasse, pcene est innocens. — Sen. R. G. III. — Delectat,juvat, decet, dedecet, impersonaliter posita, Accusativum cum Infinitivo postulant : ut, Orator em irasci minime decet. — Cic. Me juvatin prima coluisse Heliconajuventd. — Prop. R. G. IV. — Oportet vel Accusativum cum Infinitivo regit, vel Nominativum cum Subjunctivo, Conjunctione ut omissa: ut, Legem brevem esse oportet. — Cic. Me ipsum ames oportet, non mea. — Cic. R. G. V. — Pertinet, attinet, Praepositionem ad cum Accusa tivo sumunt : ut, Ad rempublicam pertinet, me conservari. — Cic. Profundat, per dot, per eat, nihil ad me attinet. — Tee. R. G. VI. — Interest et refert Genitivum admittunt : ut, Interest omnium recte facer e. — Cic. Refert compositionis, quae quibus anteponas. — Cic. Obs. 1. Cum his Verbis junguntur, loco Pronominum Personalium Ablativi feminini, mea, tud,sud, nostra, vestrd, subaudita voce re : ut, Et tud et mea interest te valere. — Cic. Quid rtfert mea, cui serviam ? — Ph^drus. Obs. 2. Adduntur his Verbis Genitivi iEstimationis, tanti, quanty mogni, parvi, pluris : ut, Utriusque nostrum magni interest* ut te videam. — Cic. Hoc non pluris rtfert, qudm si imbrem in cribrumgeras.- — Pla UT. A T o/. 1. — Verba Neutra in Passiva Voce impersonaliter usurpantur pro quibuslibet personis, Ablativo personae cum Praepositione ah vel expresso vel intellecto : ut, Ah omnibus reclamatum est. (scil. omnes reclamdrunt.) — Cic. Quid agitur? statur. (scil. statur a nobis, sive stamus.) — Tbju TfoL 2. — Ctepit, debet, desinit, potest, solet, incipit, Infinitivis Impersou&- lium praeposita, ipsa fiunt Impersonalia : ut, JPigere eumfacti ccepit. — Just. Ptrveniri ad summa, nisi ex principiis, non potest. — Quint. SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 100 DE CONSTRUCTIONE VERBORUM PASSIVORUM. § 162. R, G. — Activa sententia fere omuls ita in Passivam con* verti potest, ut Nominativus Activae sententiae fiat in Passiva Ablativus Agentis. A. Si Activae sentential Verbuni Aecusativum habet propioris Objecti, Verbum in Passiva personale erit, Accusativo Activae in Nominativum Passivae transeunte : ut, Act. Egregie consul rem gessit. Pass. Egregie ab consule res gesta est — Liv. B. Sin minus, Verbum Passivae impersonale erit, et vel sine easu stabit, vel eundem casum reget, quern in Activa* regebat : ut, Act. Hostes eonstanter pugnabant. Pass. Ab hostibus eonstanter pugnabatur. — Cjes. Act. Medicines nos indigemus. — Cic. Pass. Medicines a nobis indigetur. Act. Mihi isti nocere non possunt Pass. Mihi ab istis noceri non potest — Cic. Act. Litibus etjurgiis supersedere vos cequum est. Pass. Litibus et jurgiis supersederi a vobis aquum est — Cic. Obs. Ubi nihil ambigui esse potest, supprimitur Ablativus Agentis post Impersonalia Pussiva : ut, Itur in antiquam silvam. — Virg. Non potest jucunde vivi, nisi cum virtute vivatur. — Cic. Not. 1. — Hinc apparet, eosdem casus a Passivis Verbis regi, atque ab Activis,praeterquam unum Aecusativum propioris Objecti. Exempla pete supra : B. Not* 2. — Vapuh, veneo, exulo, liceo, fio y cum aliis quibusdam, vi PassivA construuntur : ut, Testis ab reo fustibus vaptdavit. — Quintilianus. Malo a cive spoliari, qudm ab hoste venire. — Quint. Torqueoi', infesto ne vir ab hoste cadat, — Ov DE CONSTRUCTIONE PARTICIPIORUM. { 163. R. G. — Participia, quae Verbi Adjectiva sunt, cum Sub- stantivis attribuuntur, turn etiam regunt casus Verborum a quibus oriuntur, Activa Activorum,Deponentia Pepo- nentium, Passiva Passivorum. 110 SYNTAXIS, SIVE L( Obs. 1.) Participii Praeteriti usus in Verbis Passivis atque in De ponentibus accurate distinguendus est: in Passivis enim Active usurpari nunquam potest : in Deponentibus plerisque solum Active usurpatur : ex Deponentibus tamen Transitivis raulta sunt, quorum Participia Prae terita tam Passive quam Active significant. ( Obi. 2. ) Ccenatus, pransus, Jisus, juratus, et ausus, Gavisusy solitus, ceu Deponentia recte Construimus, licet Activis orientia Verbis ; His etiam exosus, pertasus, et adde perosus. (06c*. 3.) Participium in dus Passive semper significat.J Ut, Cernimus ire suis parentia finibus astra. — Manilius. Virgo compositos ostentatura capillos. — Ausomus. Nubiferi rnontes et saxa minantia cihlo. — Silius. Nil oriturum alias, nil ortum tale fatemur. — Hon Duces functos virtute canemus. — Hor. Ausi omnes immane nefas, ausoque potiti. — Virg. Omnia ei qucesita, meditata, evigilata erant — Gelljus Male parta male dilabuntur. — Cic. Paridem solitus contendere contra. — Virg. Oczdos exosa viriles. — Ov. Pueris sententias ediscendas damns. — Sen. Vita data est utenda, datur sine fomore nobis Mutua, nee certo persoluenda die. — Ov. DE INFINITTVO SUBSTANTIVE POSITO, ET DE CONSTRUCTIONIBUS GERUNDIORUM, GERUN- DIVI, ET SUPINORUM. § 164. Infinitivus cum Gerundiis et Supinis Substantivum Verbi efficit. It, G. I. — Infinitivus Nominativi vel Accusativi loco ssepe ponitur: ut, Innidere non cadit in sapientem. — Cic. Dulce et decorum est pro patria mori. — Hor Velle suum cuique est. — Pers. Mori nemo sapiens miserum dixerit. — Cic. Multum interest inter dare et accipere. — Sen. f 165. R. G.TL. — Gerundia pro casibus Infinitivi ponuntur, et ipsa regunt casus suorum Verborum ; sed sine casu frequentius apparent. SENTENTIARUM CONSTHUCTIO. 1 1 J A- Pro Accusative) Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in dum post Praepositiones ad, inter ; rarius post ob, in, ante : ut, Breve tempus satis est longum ad bene vivendum. — Cic. Mores puerorum se inter ludendum detegunt. — Quint. E Pro Genitivo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in di post Adjectiva Genitivum regentia, et post multa Substan- tia : ut, Epaminondas studiosus erat audiendi. — Nep. Cupidus sum satisfaciendi reipublicce. — Cic. Thucydides omnes dicendi artiftcio vincit. — Cic. Scribendi rede sapere est et principium et funs. — Hor. C. Pro Dativo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in do post Ad- jectiva Commodi et Congruentise, item post Verba nonnulla: ut, Crassus disserendo par esse non potuit. — Cic. Epidicum operant queer endo dabo. — Plaut. I). Pro Ablativo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in do Causam, Instrumentum, aut Modum significans, vel cum Prae- positionibus ab, de, ex, in, cum : ut, Nihil agendo homines male facer e discunt — Colum. P. Scipio Latine loquendo cuivis erat par. — Cic. Jovem ajuvando nominamus. — Cic. Multa de bene beateque vivendo a Platone disputata sunt. — Cic. § 166. Not. — Gerundia Active significant : si vero Transitiva sunt, eorum constructio Passive repraesentari potest, imo frequentius reprassentatur, per Participium in dus, quod inde Gerundivi nomen accipit. R. G. III. — Gerundiva constructio ejusmodi est, ut Substan- tivum in Gerundii casum trahatur, cum quo concor- det Gerundivum : ut, E terra ignem elicimus ad colendos agros. — Cic. Occasio videbatur rerum novandarum,. — Liv. M.Antonius fuit triumvir reipublicoe constituenda*. — Nei-. Exercenda est memoria ediscendis veterum scriptis. — Cic. Brutus in liberandd patrid est interfectus. — Cic. j| 167. R. G. IV. — Ad Necessitatem Passive significandam Ge- rundivum in Neutro Genere impersonaliter ■ adhibetur ita, ut, cum Dativo vel Ablativo Agentis, sive expresso give intellecto, sui etiam Verbi constructunem habeat : ut, Suo cuique judicio utendum est. — Cic. Civium bonis est a vobis consulendum. — Cic. Orandum est ut sit mens sana in cor pore sauo. — Juv. Eudoxus opinatur, Chaldceis minimi esse credendum. — Cic. 112 SYNTAX IS, S1VE Obs. In Verbis Transltivis rarior est Impersonalis cocstructio, 3st tamen ubi obviam fit : ut, JEternas quoniam poenas in morte timendum. — Lucr. Gerundivum enim ipsum, Adjective positum, suapte vi Necessi- tatem exprimit ; ut, Deus et diligendus est et timendus. — Tertullianus. Agnoscenda et amplectenda sunt beneficiadivina. — S. Cyprian us. § 168. R. G. V. — Supinum in wm, vi Activa praeditum, sui Verbi casum regit; postponitur autem, ut Accusativus, Verbis motum significantibus, ad Actionis finem indicandam : ut, Ast ego non Graiis servitum matribus ibo. — Virg. Coriolanusin Volscos exsulatum abut. — Liv. Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsa. — Ov. Scitatum oracula Phcebi mittimus. — Virg. Obs. Ex Supino in iim et Impersonali Infinitivo iri conficitur Futu- rum Infinitivi Passivi : ut, Audierat non datum iri filio suo vxorem. — Ter. R. G. VI. — Supinum in u, vi Passiva praeditum, postponitur, ut Ablativus Respect lis, turn multis Adjectivis, turn Sub- stantivis/a.9, nefas, opus : ut, Nil dictufcedum visuque hcec limina tangat Intra qua puer est. — Juv. Ecce (nefas visu) serpens altaribus exit. — Ov. Sot. — Supina formam habent Substantivorum Quartae Declinationis DE ADJECTIVORUM USU. 5 1 69. (a) Primus et extremus, postremus et ultimus, imus, Intimus et medius, sic summus et inftmus, atque Ceterus et reliquus, partitive attribuuntur : ut, Prima luce summus mons a Labieno tenebatur. — Ga:9, (b) Neutra Adjectiva utriusque Numeri ponuntur inter dum Adverbialiter, praesertim apud poetas : ut, Serviet aternum, qui parvo nesciet uti. — Hor. Asper, acerba tuens, retro redit. — Virg. (p) Adjectivum saepe ita attribuitur, ut AnglicS per Adver- bium reddi necesse sit : Turn tu insiste audax muris. — Liv. Cabtris se pavidus tenebat. — Liv. SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 113 $ 170. Superlativum ita usurpatur, ut non modo altissimum omnium gradum, sed etiam praealtum quemcunque designet : ut, Ego sum miserior quam tu, quae es miserrima. — Cic. Obs. Pronomen quisque Superlativo distribuendo adhibetur : ut, Epicureos doctissimus quisque conteninit. — Cic. Maxima cuique fortunes minimi credendum est. — Liv. DE NUMERALIUM USU. | 171. A. Cardinalia. (a) Unus non, nisi cum Emphasi, ponitur : ut, Matronce annum, ut parentem, Brutum luxerunt. — Liv. Amicitia? vis est in eo, ut unus quasi animus fiat ej pluribus. — Cic. Obs. Unus saepe vim habet Superlativam, sa?pe Superlativo rum vim auget : ut, Demosthenes unus eminet inter omnes oratores Cic P. Niffidius, unus omnium doctissimus. — Cic. (b) Mille nunc Substantive, nunc Adjective, usurpatur millia Substantive tantiim : ut, Amplius mille hominum cecidit. — Nep. Mille greges illi. — Ov. Qualtuor millia hominum Capitolium occupavere. — Liv B. Ordinalia in Temporum Rationibus usurpantur : ut, Plato uno et octogesimo anno scribens mortuus est. — Cic. Octavus annus est ex quo Britanniam vicistis. — Tac. Obs. 1. Ad Ordinalia distribuenda usurpatur quisque : ut, Quinto quoque anno Sicilia tota censetur. — Cic. Ohs. 2. Alter nunc ut secundus nunc ut unus e duobus ponitur : ut, Alter ab undecimo turn me jam ceperat annus. — Virg Quidquid negat alter, et alter. — Hor. C Distributiva efficiunt ut, quod fiat, cuique e pluribus, vel a quoque, vel quoque tempore factum esse appareat : ut, Militibus quini viceni denarii dati sunt. — Liv. Verberibus mulcant, sexageni singulos. — Tac. Ursa? pariunt plurimum quinos. — Plin. |"72. 1). (a) As Romanus, sive Libra, antiquissimis temporibus seneus erat : unde Genitivus ceris elliptice ponitur ali- quando, Assibus omissis : ut, Miliibus ceris quinquaginta census est. — Liv I 114 SYNTAXIS, SIVE (b) Nummus Romanus, qui antiquissime binos Asses cum Semisse continebat, nine Sestertius (semis-tertius) voca- tus, Siglum habebat HS, corruption ex IIS (2^) : nt, Tiberius populo trecenos nummos viritim dedit. — Suet. Pretium constitutum est in singulos modiosHS terni. — Cic. (c) Sestertium continebat mille Sestertios, et ipsuru interdum Siglo HS design atur : ut, Ducena sestertia singulis dedit. — Tac. Candidati HS quingena deposuerunt. — Cic. Obs. Adverbia Numeral ia, decies et quae majora sunt, ubi numerum Sestertiorum definiunt, suppleri sibi volunt centena mittia: ut, Vicies HS( Sestertii, Sestertium), id est, 2,000,000 Nummiim. Ter et quudrayies HS - 4,300,000 Nummiim. DE PRONOMINUM USU. I 1 73. A. Personalia et Possessiva. (a) Pronomina Pluralia, nos, noster, pro Singularibus ego^ meus, saspe ponuntur : ut, Nbris 7ios, inquit, docti surrms. — Hob. Ad nostra me studia referam literarum. — Cic. (b) Sui et suus Reflexiva sunt, et referuntur ad Subjectura tertiae Persona : ut, Senatui pojndus moderandi sui potestatem tradidit. — Cic. Themistocles domicilium Magnesia sibi constituit. — Nep. Sentit animus se vi sud, non aliend, moveri. — Cic. Homerum Colophmiii civem esse dicunt suum. — Cic. Ob*. 1. Referri possunt Reflexiva ad Objectum, si ipsa Subjecto appendent, si Subjectum prima? est aut secundae Per- sonam, si denique nullus ambiguitati locus est ; quod ubi fit, Objecto plerumque postponitur Reflexivum : ut, Scipionem impellit ostentatio sui. — Cms. Ccesarem sua natura mitiorem facit. — Cic Apibus fructum restituo suum. — PhjED. Suis jlammis delete Fidenas. — Liv. Malta sunt civibus inter se communia. — Cic. ( Obs.) Sed Pronominis quisque casibus Reflexivum praeponitur : ut, Sui cuique mores fingunt fortunam. — Nep. Longius aut propiiis mors sua quemque manet. — Propfrt. Ob*, 2. Referuntur etiam Reflexiva ad Personam inderinitam : ut, Subsequitur coecus Amor sui. — Hor. Deforme est de se prcedicare. — Cic. Difficile est sua vitia ndssc. — Cic. 8ENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 115 Obe. 3. Ubi Reflexivo non est locus, usurpatur Demonstrativum, pra>sertim is .• ut, Aranti Quintio nuntiatum est eum dictatorem factum — Cic. Condiunt JEgyptii mortuos et eos domi servant. — Cic Chilius te rogat, et ego ejus rogatu. — Cic. Obs. 4. Pro Reflexivi casibus, si in his futura est ambiguitas, Pro- nominis ipse casus obliqui ponuntur : ut, Ca'.sar milites incusavit, cur de sua virtute aut de ipsius diligentid desperarent. — Cms, 174. B. (a) Pronomina Demonstrativa ita fere distinguenda sunt is est de quc. perdant ! — Ter. (c) Subjunctivus proprie dictus, quia Verbis et Particuli* subjungitur. D. Superius dictum est (§ 164.) Infinitivum quasi Substantivum Verbi esse, quod vel subjective vel objective stare posset. Jam verb Simplex Infinitivus (a) Subjective jungitur Verbis Impersonalibus : ut, Juvat ire sub umbras. — Virg. Non cuivis homini contingit udire Corinthum. — IIor. Libet semper discere. — Cic. (b) Objective sequitur multa Verba, et in primis (1) Verba Voluntatis, volo, nolo, malo, aveo, cupio y &c. (2) Verba Potential, Officii, et Consuetudinis, possum, quco^ Jtequeo, debeo, soleo, consuesco, &c. SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT10. 119 (3) Verba Actionis incipienim, continuandae, vel depo- nendae, ccepi, mediior, statuo, disco, ds>ceo, conor % pei go. desino, &c, ut, bolent diu cogitare qui magna volunt gerere. — Cic. Misere cupis, inquit, abire. — Hor. Socrates parens philosophies jure did potest. — Cic liitueri solem adversum nequimus. — Cic. Suos quisque debet tueri. — Cic. Oallinas saginare Deliaci ccepere. — Plin. Statui res gestas Romanorum perscribere. — Saul. Scipiones Saguntum pergunt ire. — Liv. Vena? et arterial micare non desinunt. — Cic. Quid sitfuturum eras, fuge qua?rere. — Hor. (•)) Pracdicative sequitur Verba Passiva multa, quibus in Activa subjun^itur Accusativus cum Infinitivo, videor, credor, putor, existimor, dicor, feror, narror, trador menwror, &c. : ut, Videor pios errare per lucos. — Hor. Verus patriot dicer is esse pater. — Mart. Aristides unus omnium justissimus fuisse traditur. — Cic. Ohi. 1 Post Adjectiva vel Poeticus est Infinitivus, vel Argentea?, quatu vocant, JEtatis : ut, Et cantare pares et respondere paraii. — Virg. Cerens in vitium jlecti, monitoribus asper. — Hor. Agricola fuit peritus obsequi Tac. Obi. l 2. Futuri Infinitivi, cum Activi, turn Passivi, circumlocutiosaepefit per fore ut, futurum esse ut y cum Subjunctivo : ut, Spero fore ut in cozlum migremus Cic. Dixit futurum esse ut balnea incalescerent. — Tac. Pompeius dixerat, fore uti exercitus Ccesaris pelleretur. — CiES. Ous. 8. Infinitivus Historicus locum habet in gravi narratione : ut, Turn verd ingenti sono caelum strepere, et inter horrendos fragores micare ignes. — Liv. Oba 4. Pro Infinitivo Praesentis eleganter usurpatur Infinitivus Per- fecti; ut, Commisiste cave qua mox mutare Jahore* Hok. QutexMe ertt meiiits. — i^iv. 120 SYNTAXIS, S1VE PARS II. DE COMPOSITA SENTENTIA. § 180. Prefatory Excursion. f, Oratio Recta means any statement, command, or question directly pi t. Oratio Obliqua means any statement, command, or question indirectly put, depending on some verb which stands in Oratio Recta, Thus, Valeo, An valet? Vale, are Oratio Recta: while Scin* me valere? Nescio an valeat, Curaut valeas, contain Oratio ObJiqua ; me valere depending on the Oratio Recta scin ; an valeat on nescio ; ut valeas on cura. IT. A Compound Sentence consists of two or more Simple Sentences connected together ; of which one is the Principal, the others either (A) Coordinate, or (B) Subordinate. A. A Coordinate Sentence is one which does not depend in construction upon the Principal Sentence. Coordinate Sentences are introduced by such particles as et, que, nsc ; aut, vel ; sed, autem ; nam, enim ; igitur, itaque ; deinde, denique ; &c: as, Gyges a nullo videbatur / iyse autem omnia videbat. — Cic. B. A Subordinate Sentence is one which depends in construction on the Principal Sentence. Subordinate Sentences are of three kinds • — (1) Substantival: (2) Adverbial: (3) Adjectival. 1 ) A Substantival Sentence is one which stands, like a Substantive, as Subject, Object, or in Apposition. Substantival Sentences belong to Oratio Obliqua, and are of three kinds: (a) Oblique Enuntiation: (b) Oblique Petition : (c) Oblique Interrogation, (a) The Oblique, or Indirect Enuntiation, is formed generally by the Accusative with Infinitive Mood, sometimes by ut with Subjunctive, or quod with Indicative or Subjunctive Mood. Thus, Amicitia, nisi inter bonos, esse non potest, is a Direct Enuntiation : whilst Verum est, amicitiam, nisi inter bonos, esse non posse, is a Compound Sen- tence, containing the Direct Enunciation, Verum est, and the Oblique Enunciation, amicitiam, nisi inter bonos, esse non posse ; which is Substantival, being he Subject of the Verb est, and having verum for its Predicate. So, Invidia glorut comes eM, is a Direct Enunciation ; but Est hoc commune vitium, ut invidia glories comes sit, is a Compound Sentence, containing the Oblique "Smmtiation, ut invidia gloria comes sit, in Apposition to hoc, the Subject of est, of wnich commune vitium is the Predicate. Again, Calet ignis is a Direct Enuntiation : Sentimus calere ignem a Com- pound Sentence, having the Direct Enuntiation sentimus, and the Oblique, calere ignem, which is the Object of sentimus. (fc)The Oblique Petition is formed by the Subjunctive Mood, with SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTS). J 21 or without the Conjunction ut or ne, or by the Infinitive; following Verbs of desire, command, endeavour, &c. Thus Mane in sententid is a Direct Petition, which may be expressed in a Compound Sen- tence by Oro ut maneas in sententid, Oro maneas in sententid, or Oro te manere in sententid. (t) The Oblique Interrogation is formed by dependent Interrogatives, whether Pronouns or Particles, governing a Subjunctive Mood. Thus Quis est? is a Direct Interrogation: but Nescio quis sit, incertum est quis sit, are Compound Sentences, containing the Oblique Interrogation, quis sit, which is the Object of nescio, and the Subject of est. (2) An Adverbial Sentence is one which qualifies the Principal Sen- tence like an Adverb, answering the questions, how, why, when, &c. Adverbial Sentences are formed by Conjunctions, and are: (a) Con- secutive (so that); (b) Final (in order that); (c) Causal (because since); (d) Temporal (when, while, until, §"c. ); (e) Conditional (if, unless); (/) Concessive (although, whereas); (g) Comparative (as if, as though, $*c. ). (S) An Adjectival Sentence is one which qualifies the Principal Sen- tence like an Adjective or Epithet. It is formed by the Relative Pronoun qui, or by a Relative Particle. The Relative Pronoun qui qua. quod (with its Particles) has great influence in Latin Construction. It is of all persons, and may be used compendiously as a substitute for the union of a Con- junction with a Personal Pronoun. Hence it forms Coordinate Sentences when used for et ego, et tu, et is, &c. ; for ego autem, tu autem, is autem, &c. ; for ego igitur, tu igitur, is igitur, See. ; for ego enim, tu enim, is enim, &c. And it forms Subordinate Sentences when used for ut ego, ut tu, ut is, &c. ; for quia ego, quia tu, quia is, &c. ; for si ego, si tu, si is, &c. ; for etsi ego, etsi tu, etsi is, &c. Note. — It is to be observed that Subordinate Sentences may have others subordinate to them, in relation to which they are therefore principal clauses. From what has been said of Substantival Sentences, it appears that such principal clauses of Oratio Obliqua are, mostly, either in the Infinitive or in the Subjunctive Mood. Its subordinate clauses generally take the Subjunctive ; as may be seen in the subjoined example : — • Oratio Recta.— Ars earum rerum est, qua sciuntur ; oratoris autem omnis actio opinnmibus, non scientid continetur : nam et apud eos dicimus, qui nesciunt, et cu dicimus, qua nescimus ipsi. — Cic. Oratio Obliqua. — (Antonius apud Ciceronem docet :) Artem earum rerun- esse, qua sciantur ; oratoris autem omnem actionem opinione, non scientid, contineri : quia et apud ecs dicat, qui nesciant, et ipse dicat, quod nesciat. — Quint. Oratio Recta may be virtually oblique, when it contains the statement of an opinion or thought. Thus, the sentence, Themistocles noctu ambulabat, quod somnum capere non posset, implies that Themistocles alleged inability to sleep as the reason wby he walked by night 122 SYNTAX13, SIVE DE SENTENTIIS SUBSTANTIVALIBUS. § 181 (A) Enuntiatio Obliqua. JR. G. — Infinitivus cum Accusative- sui Subjecti (a) Subjective jungitur Copulae est et Verbis Impersonalibus: ut* Facinus est vinciri civem Romanum. — Cic. Omnibus bonis expedit salvam esse rempublicam. — Cic. Constat leges ad salutem civium inventas esse. — Cic. (b) Objective jungitur multis Verbis, in quibus inest sen- tiendi aut declarandi vis : ut, Pompeios desedisse terrce motu audivimus. — Sen. Xenophanes ait lunam habitari. — Cic. (c) Appositionem facit aliquando : ut, Mud temere dictum, sapiejites omnes esse bonos. — Cic. Obs. 1. Pro hoc Infinitivo saepe ponitur ut cum Subjunctivo : ul Reliquum est ut officiis certemus inter nos. — Cic. Expedit ut civitutes sua jura habeant. — Just. Mud mea refert, te ut videam. — Cic. Saepe qudd cum Indicativo, ni poscatur Subjunctivus : ut, Gratum est qudd patrics civem populoque dedisti. — Juv. Hoc prcestamus maximd feris, qudd loquimur. — Cic. Mitto qudd omnes meas tempestates subieris. — Cic. ( Obs. ) Oportet et necesse est, Subjunctivum regentia, ut omittunt ut, Philosophies servias oportet, ut liber sis. — Cic. Virtus voluptatis aditus intercludat necesse est. — Cic Obs. 2. Sperandi et pollicendi Verba malunt Infinitivum Futuri : ut, Sperabam id me assccuturum. — Cic. Pollicebatur pecuniam se esse redditurum. — Cic. Obs. 3. Post metuendi formulas regunt Subjunctivum ne et ut pre ne non : ut, Verendum est ne fames in urbe sit. — Cic. O puer % ut sis vitalis metuo. — Hon. Obn. 4. Indignationem notat Infinitivus Interrogans : ut, Mene incepto desistere victam ? — Vikg. Vel ejus vice ut cum Subjunctivo : ut, Te ut ulta resfrangat ? — Cic. § 182. (B) Petitio Obliqua. JR. G. — Optandi, rogandi, liortandi^ tmperandi, permiitendu eu- randi, enitendi, efficiendi, similibusque formulis additur Subjunctivus cum Conjunctionibus ut, ne, vel omissfi aliquando Conjunctione : (a) Subjective : ut, Pottulatur ab amico ut sit sincerus. — Cic. Cavendum est ne assentatori patefacias aures* — Cic. Hcbc omnia frcetermittas licet. — Cic. SENTENT1AEUM CONSTRUCTIO. 123 (b) Objective : ut, lmmortalia ne speres monet annus, — Hob. Potes efficere ut male moriar, ne moriar non potes. — Plin Sine te exorem, mi pater. — Ter. (c) Per Appositionem : ut, Hoc te rogo, ne demittas animum. — Cic. Vetus est lex ilia, ut idem amid velint. — Cic. Obs. Post multa ex his Verbis aeque placet Infinitiva constructio: ut. Pompeius rem ad arma deduci studebat. — CiBS. Jubet nos Pythius Apollo noscere nosmet ipsos. — ■ Cic. 1 83. (C) Interrogatio Obliqua. It G. — Pronominibus et Particulis interrogandi, subordinate positis, Subjunctivus additur : (a) Subjective : ut, In beneficio videndum est, quando et cui et quemadmo- dum et quare demus. — Cic. (b) Objective : ut, Tu quotus esse velis r escribe. — Hor. Quis est, quin cernat, quanta vis sit in sensibus f — Cic. (c) Per Appositionem : ut, Ipse quis sit, utrum sit, an non sit, id quoque nescit. Catull. Not Talia sunt : Quis, quantus, qualis, qui, quot, quotus, unde, vbi, quando, Qudm, quamobrem, quare, cur, quomodd, num, n€, ut, an, utrum. DE SENTENTIIS ADVERBIALIBUS. 184. (A) Consecutivse Sententiae. R. G. — Ut, ut non, ut nihil, ut nullus, ut nemo, consecutive sensu, Subjunctivum postulant. (a) Post Demonstrativa sic, ita, eo, tarn, adeo, tot, tantus, tans, is, hie, hue : ut, Quis tarn demens est ut sua voluntate m&reat? — Cic. Titus ita facilis fuit ut nulli quidquam negaret. — Evtr. Tantus terror fuit ut egredi nemo sit ausus. — Nep. Decori vis ea est ut ah honesto non queat separari. — Cic. (b) Suppresso Demonstrativo : ut, Arboribus consita Italia est, ut tota pomarium videatur. — Varro. (c) Post Comparatlvum et qudm : ut, laocrates majore ingenio est qudm ut cum Lysid compart" tur. — Cic. 1 24 SYNIaXIS, S1VE Obs. Tantum abest duas sententias sibi subordinatas habet> primam Substantival em, alteram Adverbialem : ut, Tantum abest ut nostra miremur, ut nobis non tathjaciat ipse Demosthenes. — Cic. § 185. (B) Finales Sententiae. R. G. — Ut, ne, ut ne, finali sensu, Subjunctivum postulant : ut, Utjugulent homines, surgunt de node latrones. — Juv. Legum idcirco servi sumus, utliberi esse possimus. — Cic. Ne vana urbis magnitudo sit, Romulus asylum aperit. — Liv. Scipio rus abiit, ne ad causarn dicendam adesset. — Cic. Exercenda est animadoersio ut ne quid temere agamus. — Cic. 5 186. (C) Causales Sententiae. R. G. I. — Quum, causali sensu, Subjunctivum pier unique regit ; sed interdum Indicativum : ut, Quce quum ita sint, in alia omnia abeo. — Cic. Quum in Matii familiar itaiem venisti, gaudeo. — Cic. R. G.U. — Quod, qv undo, rpaa, quaudoquidem, quoniam, siquU demque, causali sensu, Indicative- gaudent, nisi opus sit Subjunctive : ut, Adsunt propterea quod officium sequuntur. — Cic lucent, quia periculum metuunt. — Cic. Dicite, quandoqnidem in molli consedimus herbd. — ViRG. Quoniam jam nox est^ discedite. — Liv. § 67. (D) Temporales Sententiae. R. G. I. — Quum, quando, quoties, simul, ut, simul atque, ubi postquam, temporales, Indicativo gaudent : quum saepe Subjunctivo, post et ante Tempus Praeteritum : ut, Tua res agitur, paries quum proximus ardet. — Hon. Ut veni coram, non sum permulta locitus. — Hob. Miserum estfodere, ubi sitis fauces tenet. — Plaut. Zenonem, quum Athenis essem, audiebam frequenter. — Cic. Deccssit Agesilaus, quum in portum venisset. — Nep. R. G. TL* — Dum, donee, quoad, antequam, priusquam, pro sententia loci, nunc Indicativum, nunc Subjunctivum eapiunt : ut, HomihtiS) dum docent, discunt. — Sen. Expectate dum consul fiat Kreso. — Liv. Cato, quoad vixit, virt.utum laude crevit. — Nep. Opprrire quoad scire possis, quid tibi agendum sit. — Cic Anteipmm opprimit lux, erumpamus. — Liv. Providentia est, per quum animus aliquid videt> antequam factum sit. — C>c. SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT10. 125 §188. (E) Conditionales Sententiae. R. G. I. — Si, nisi, ubi conditio, ut incerta, proponitur, Con- junctivo praeinittuntur ; alias, Indicativo : ut, Si vales, bene est. — Cic. Sincerum est nisi vas, quodcunque infundis acescit. — Hor. Si quod erat grande vas, lesti offer ebant. — Cic. Si noles sanus, curves hydropicus. — Hor. Sume, catelle : negat : si non des, optet. — Hor. Siforet in terris, rider et Democritus. — Hor. Si id scissem, nunquam hue tulissem pedem. — Ter. Si Atheniensis esses, clarus nunquam fuisses. — Cic. JR. G. II. — Modb, dum, dummodo, modb ut, conditional! sensu, Subjunctivum regunt : ut, Manent ingenia senibus, modb permaneatindustria. — Cic. Caligula jactabat illud: Oderint dum metuant. — Suet. Scies, modb ut tacere possu. — Ter. | 189. (F) Concessivae Sententiae. R. G. I. — Etsi, tametsi, etiamsi, pro re nata nunc Indicativuni nunc Conjunctivum capiunt : ut, Etsi culpa tenemur, scelere liberati sumus. — Cic. Obtundis, tametsi intelligo. — Ter. Etiamsi non is esset Ca?sar qui est, tamen ornandus videretur. — Cic. R. G. II. — Quamquam, utut, Indicativo gaudent : ut, Quanquam festinas, non est mora longa. — Hor. Utut erga me est meritus, mihi cordi est tamen. — Peaut R. G. III. — Quamvis, quantumvis, licet, ut, quum, ne, con- cessivo sensu, Subjunctivum regunt: ut, Quod turpe est, quamvis lateat, nonjiet honestum. — Cic. Licet vitium sit ambitio, causa virtutum est. — Sen. Ut desint vires, tamen est laudandu voluntas. — Ov. Phocionfuit pauper, quum divitissimus esse posset. — Nep. Ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est. — Cic. Obs. 1. Quamvis cum Indicativo reperitur apud historicos et poetas : ut, Quamvis ingenio non valet, arte valet. — Ov. Obs. 2. Eleganter excidunt Conjunctiones si, etsi : ut, Partem opere in tanto, sineret dolor, Icare, haberes. — Virg Naturam expellas furcd, tamen usque recurret. — Hon. § 190. (G) Comparativas Sententiae. R. G. — Comparativae Parti culae quasi, tanouam, cm, velut, cum similibus, Subjunctivum regunt : ut, Parvi primo ortujacent, tanqwim sine animo sint. — Cic. Turn verb attoniti, ceu templo irrumperet hostu Exsiluere patres. — Su, 126 STNTAXIS, S1VE DE SENTENTIIS ADJECTIVALIBUS. $ 191.12. G. L — Relativum, qui qua quod, Indicativo jungitur, nisi opus sit Subjunctivo : ut, Quis fuit, horrendos primus qui protulit enses ? — O v. Obs. Itidem Correlati va qualis, quantus, quot ; et Universalia quis* quis, quicunque, quotcumque, cum similibus. § 192. R. G. II. — Qui, causali sensu, Subjunctivo gaudet : ut, Miser et tui me, qui hunc facias inimicum tibi. — Tee. Obs. Ita non quo, pro non quod: ut, Non quo quenquam plus amem eo feci. — Ter. Not. — Similiter construitur non quin pro non quia non. $ 193 JR. G. III. — Qui, concessivo sensu, Subjunctivo gaudet : ut, Egomet, qui leviter Gracas Uteras attigissem, tamen Athenis commoratus sum. — Cic. § 194. i?. G. IV. — Qui, finali sensu, Subjunctivum regit : ut, Litteras misi, quibus et placarem eum et mouerem. — Cic. Obs. Hinc quo pro ut eo Subjunctivum regit : ut, Ager novatur, quo melrores fetus edat. — Cic. § 195. R. G. V. — Qui, consecutivo sensu, Subjunctivum regit : (a) Post Demonstrativa, talis, is pro talis, tantus, tarn, adeo, similia : ut, Non is sum qui his rebiis delecter. — Cic. Nihil tanti est quo vendamus libertatem. — Cic. (li) Omisso Demonstrativo : ut, Audies ex me quod non omnes probent. — ^Cic. (c) Post Comparativum et qudm : ut, Majora deliquerant qudm quibus ignosci posset. — Lit (d) Post dignus, indignus, idoneus, aptus : ut, Dignus est qui imperet. — Cic. (e) Ubicunque significat talis ut : sic enim construitur (1) Post est, sunt, invenio, reperio, habeo, similia : ut, Est qui vinci possit. — Hon. Inventus est quiflammis imponeret manum. — Liv. Habes qui assideat, f omenta paret. — Hon. (2) Post aliquis, pauci, multi, solus, similia, indefinite po sita: ut, Estaliquid quod non oporteat, etiamsi licet — Cic. Solus es, Cai Casar, cujus in victoria nemo ceciderii nisi armatus. — Cic . SENTENT1ARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 127 (8) Post nemo, nihil, nullus, similia, item post Interrogative negationem expectantia : ut, Nihil est quod tarn deceat qudm constantia. — Cic. Quis estquinon oderit protervam pueritiam ? — Cic. Ohs. Relativse Particulae quo, qua, quomodo, quare, ubi, unde, cur t cum similibus, iisdem fere regulis, quibus Relativum qui qucB quod, Indicativum vel Subjunctivum postulant : ut, Perge quo ccepisti. — Cic. Digna res est ubi nervos intendas. — Ter. Erat nihil cur properato opus esset, — Cic. 196- Not. 1. Quominus, post Verba quae quid impedimenti continent, Subjunctivum regit inceptaa, sed impeditse actionis : ut, Senectus non impedit quominus litteris utamur — Cic. Non recusavit quomiuus pcenam subiret. — Nep. Per Afranium stetit quominus dimicaretur. — C^es. ( Obs. ) Ne post eadem Verba prohibet actionem : ut, Pontus erat vetitus ne mergeret aiquore terram. — Manil. Sulpicius intercesserat ne exules reducerentur. — Cic- Not. 2. Quin (qui-ne, qui-ne) Subjunctivum regit : (a) Pro qui non post Negativa et Interrogativa : ut, Nihil est quin male narrando possit depravari. — Teb. Nullum intermisi diem quin scriberem. — Cic. Quisfundum colit, quin sues habeat? — Varro. (6) Pro qubd non, ut non, post negationem vel interrogationem dubitationis, abstinentice, impedimenti, causa, et similium : ut, Non dubito quin fuerint ante Homerum poeta. — Cic. Nee requies quin mox pomis exuberet annus. — Virg. Facere non possum quin quotidie ad te mittam. — Cic. Prorsus nihil abest quin sim miserrimus. — Cic. Quin ad diem decedam nulla causa est. — Cic. Quis dubitet quin in virtute divitiat positce sint ? — Cic. Quid est causes quin decemviri cohniam in Janiculum possint deducere ? — Liv. DE ALUS QUIBUSDAM PARTICULIS. J 197 (A) Nedum Subjunctivo jungitur : ut, Mortalia facta peribunt, Nedum sermonum stet honos et gratia vivax. — Hon. (B) Ne . . . quidem negativam vim auget, interposita inter ne et quidem ea parte sentential, in qua fit emphasis : (a) Praecedente Verbo cum altera Negativa : ut, Non prcetereundum est ne id quidem. — Cic i^8 STNTAXIS, SIVE (b) Sequente Verbo sine altera Negativa ut, Ne ad Catonem quidem provocabo. — Cic C. (a) Ne, an, interrogativae particulae, dubitanter interro- gant : num responsionem expectat negativani : nonne t annon affirmativam : ut, Qualis est tua mens ? potesne dicer e ? — Cic. An tu me tristem esse putas ? — Plaut. Num negare audes ? — Cic. Canis nonne similis lupo est? — Cic. (b) In Duplici Interrogatiune sunt ha? varietates . 1. Utrum sequente an; ut, Hcec utrum abundantis an egentis signa sunt? — Cic. 2. Num sequente an : ut, Num duas habetis patrias an est ilia patria com- munis? — Cic. 3. Ne sequente an : ut, Romamne venio an hie maneo an Arpinum fugio? — Cic. 4. Particula omissa, sequente an aut ne : ut Interrogatur tria pauca sint anne multa ? — Cic. Quceram justum sit necne po'ema ? — Hor. DE CONSTRUCTIONIBUS ORATIONIS OBLIQUJE. $ 198.72. G.I. — Sententia, quae subordinatnr Orationi Obliquae, sive Relativo sive Conjunctione intercedente, Subjun- ctivum exigit : ut, Ais, quoniam sit natura mortalis, immortalem etiam esse oportere. — Cic. Scito me, postquam in urbem venerim, redisse cum libris in gratiam. — Cic . Fateor me oratoren\ ft modb sim, ex Academic spatiis exstitisse. — Cic. Simile veri est, non ex iisdem semper populis exercitue scriptos, quanquam eadem semper gens helium in- tulerit. — Liv. Sapientissimum esse dicunt eum, cui, quod opus sit, ipn veniat in mentem ; propius accedere ilium, qui alterius bene inventis obtemperet. — Cic. Caesar ad me scripsit, gratissimum sibi esse quod quieverim. — Cic. SENTENT1ARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 129 199. R. G. II. — Sententla Subordinata, qua 1 opinionem cujuspiam vel cogitationem indicat, sive Relativo sive Conjunetione interoedente, Subjunctivum exigit : ut, Laudat Africanum Pancetius quod fucrit abstinent. — Cic . Alium rogantes regem miser e ud Jovem, Inutilis quoniam esset quifuerat dat.us. — Ph^dr. Sapiens non dubitat, si ita melius sit, migrare de vita. — Cic. Darius ejus pontis, dum ipse abesset, custodes reliquit. — Nep. Etsi nihil habeat in se gloria, cur expetatur, tamen virtu* tern tanquam umbra sequitur. — Cic. In Hispauia prorogatum veteribus imperatoribus est imperium cum exercitibus quos haberent. — Liv. Quum abessem, quotiescupque patria in mentem veniret, ha'C omnia occurrebant, colles, campique, et Tiberis, et hoc ccelum, sub quo natus educatusque essem. — Liv. 200. It. G. III. — Relativum vel Conjunctio, quum subordinatur Subjunctive-, Subjunctivum regit : ut, Tanta est caritas patria, ut vestris eliam legionibus sane* tus essem, quod earn a me servatam esse meminissent. —Cic. Equidem illnd molior, ut mihi Ca>sar concedat, ut absim quum aliquid in senatu contra Cna?um agatur. — Cic. Erat in Hortensio memoria tanta, ut, qua secum corn* mentatus esset, ea sine scripto verbis eisdem redderet, quibus cogitavisset. — Cic. Net. — Oratio Obliqua longe excurrit apud Historicos ; Enuntia- tiones in prim is, tuni etiam his adspersae Petitiones lnterro- gationesque : ut, Orat Tarquhrius Veientes, ne se extorrem egentem ex tanto modd regno cum Liberia adolescentibus ante oculos suos perire tiuerent : ados peregre in regnum Romam accitos ; se regem, augentem hello Romanum imperium, a proximis scelerald conjuration* pulsum : . . . patriam se regnumqne suum repetere, et per- sequi ingratos cives velle : ferrent opem, adjuvarctt ; suag quoque veteres ivjurias ultum irent, toties cocsas itgiones, agrum ademptum. — Liv. Docebat Casar, quum veteres qudmque justce causes necessitn- dinis ipsis cum sEduis intercederent ; qnre senatus consulta, q7/oties, qudmque honorijica in eos facta essent ; ut omni tempore totius Gallia principatum JEdui tcnuissent, prius etiam qudm nostram amicitiam appctissetit : populi Roman* kanc esse cousuetudinem, ut socio?, atque amicos nun modd sui nihil deperdere, sed gratia, dignitate, honort an«.liores vel it j$»e : quod verd ad amicitiam populi Romani attxdissent, id iio eripi quis pati posset ? — Cm&. 130 PROSODIA COMPENDIUM. § 201. De Syllabarum quantitate disserit, Et de Metrorum legibus, Prosodia. DE SYLLABARUM QUANTITATE, DEFINITIONES. 1. Mensura Tempus eloquendae est sjllabae: Quod et vocatur Quantitas. Obs. Vocalis observetur : in vocalium Stat quantitate syllabarum quantitas. 2 Longx (-) brevisque (v..) Temporis notas habes. Obs. 1. Singulis longis brevibusque binis Par est eademque potestas. Obs. 2. Communis audit ilia, quas interdum brevis, Et rursus eadem longa vocalis sonat. Xot. — If non babetur consonans, nullamque vim Exercet in Prosodia. REGULiE QUANTITATIS GENERALES. $ 202. R. G, I. — Omnis Diphthongus contractaque Syllaba longa est: Ut praes, heu, gaudens : coago fit cogo, nihil nil ; Pro bovibus bobus ; momentum pro movimentum. Obs. At tu vocali prdeeuntem corripies prce. § 203. R. G. II. — Dant Derivatis proprium Primaria tempus : Sic saliceta salix, pumum pomaria format. Obs. Fit tamen in multis aliter : sic dret arena, Sic humanus hdmo est ; sic lucet parva lucerna. R. G. III. — Nee non Simplicium tempus Composta sequuntur A puto sic reputo, sic a mhnor immemor exstat. Obs. Sunt excepta tamen : sic nubo pronuba format. | 20 1 R. G. IV. — Prsevia vocali vocalis corripitur : ceil Principium^ prohibe : Obs. 1 Sed rnulta hinc excipe Gra?ca : ut, CAuonis, jEngas, Clio, MyrtOus, Enyo, COMPENDIUM. 131 Obs, 2. A longam Primas priscus Genitivus habebit t Terrdi, auldi ; sic format Quinta, diei : Scribe tamen rei atque rei, jidei atque Jidei. Obs. 3. Longa Vocativo est penultima vocis in aiits, Aut eius ; Cdi, Pompei, hac lege sonantur. Obs. 4. IVerbifio longa est, nisi cum comes est er -, " Omnia nunc flent, fieri qua posse negabam. " Obs. 5. I dat communem Genitivus in ius : ut Me Illlus illlusque facit : sic ius iusque Totus et unus habent, ipse isteque, nullus et ullus: Alterius semper breviat ; producit alius. Obs. 6. Nunc Diana feras agitat, nunc dia Diana. Sic She vel She ; sed semper dicimus eheu. § 205. R. G. V. — Longa situ vocalis erit, quam bina sequetui Consona ; sic, pallor trlstis : seu voce in eadera J subit, x, aut z ; sic, Ajax, axis, Amazon. Obs, Excipe quadrijugus, bijugus, quae corripiunt i. Not. — Vocalis, vi curta sua, communis erit, si Consona postponens liquidam sibi muta sequetur : Sic recte lugubre melos vel lugubre dices : Duplex sive duplex, Tecmessam sive T&cmessam. ' Obs. 1 . ) N post g longam dat semper ; ut agnus et Ignis. Nee minus m post g ; tegmen quod monstrat et agmev* (Obs. 2.) Syllaba si liquidam diviserit altera muta, Longa prior semper : quod sub-ruit, db-lue, monstrant § 206. R. G. VI. — Perfecti brevis est geminati syllaba prima : XJt,pepuli, duiici, picpugi, cecidi, atque cecidi, R. G. VII. — Efficiunt primam Perfecta disyllaba longam, Ut, vidi, tegi, movique. Sed excipis octo : Bibi, dedi, fui, fxdi, Steti, stilt, tuli, scidi, G. VIII. — Primam producuntque disyllaba rite Supina, Ut, visum, lotum, motumque. Sed excipis octo : Hum, citum, datum, litum, Rdtum, rutum, solum, situm. DE QUANT1TATE SYLLABARUM FINALIUM. § 207. R. I. — Pleraque produces Monosyllaba, qualia me, ver* Obs. Corripiuntur in I, 6, d, t, ut, vel, sub, id, it, stdt : Es cum compositis, ut adit : qui, ve, quumque rogat, n#, F&c, nic, an, in, fir, pei; ter, vir, cdr, quis, 6i*» is et ei». 132 PROSODLE § 208 R. II. — Producuntur in A; ceu frustra, inirdque, pardauA. Obs. Sed casus rectos et quartos excipe : quales, Carmind Musd canit ; resonant Amaryllidd sylvae. Atque vocativos plerosque, ut Orestd, Thyettd : Ejd, itd particulas, cumque his quid, quae breviant a. § 209. R. III. — Corripiuntur in E : ceu lege Hmete care^e* Obs. E longam Prima? casus Quintaeque requirunt, Ut Thisbe, specie : quae derivantur ab ill is, Ut quart! atque hodie : contractaque, qualia Tempe": Verba in eo primi numeri Mandantia, ut audi? : (Sed cave sive cave scribendi est aqua potestas) Ex Adjectivis Adverbia ducta Secundae, Ut rnisere: jungantur ohe, fermeqxie, fergque. § 210. R. IV. — Producuntur in /: ceu did, o?'Mq\xe, dollqxx^ Obs. Attamen hinc multos Graecorum deme Dativos Atque Vocativos, ut Thyrsidi, Phyllidi, Chlori: Sicubi, necubi deme, nisi et quasi, queis brevis est i, (At mihi, ubi, tibi, ibi, sibi, communem taciunt i.) § 211. R. V. — Producuntur in O: ceu virgo, uUrdqne, juvoque Obs. At putd finalem, scio, nescid, corripiunt O : Adde modo et composta, dud, octd, egd, queis citd junge. O proprium claudens nomen communis habetur, Ut Matho, (sed longa est in Graecis semper, ut Argd). Quaedam Flaccus habet communia, plurima Naso, Plura poetarum corruptior addidit aetas. R. VI. — Producuntur in U : sic tu, dictuque, diuque. R. VII. — Corripiuntur in Y: sic dant cheljj, Tiphy, poe^ai. 212. jR. VIII. — In C producuntur, ut illic (excipe donee). R. IX. — Corripe in L, D, T : sic Hannibal, Mud, amavit. R. X. — Corripiuntur in N: ceu culmen. (At excipe Graeca Multa, ut HymSn, AcrOn, vocali praedita longa.) R. XL — Corripiuntur in R : ceu calcar, amabitur, Hector. Obs. Graeca tamen, crater, cether, producis, et aSr. § 213. R, XII. — Producuntur in As : ut terras (Excipe Graeca Queis Genitivus -ddis, ceu Pallas : et excipe casus Crescentum quartos, ceu lampadds : his ands adde. COMPENDIUM. 133 R. XIII. — Producuntur in Es, ut sedes atque rideres* Obs. Excipienda tamen qua? Gragci corripiunt ; ut Troadtis : excipias etiam penes, excipiasque Crescentis brevis est penultima queis Genitivi, Ut seges (at paries semper producitur, atque Pes cum compositis : abies, arie'sque, Ceresque). § 214. R. XIV. Corripiuntur in Is : ceu diceris } utilis, enxls. Obs. Obliqui casus plurales excipiuntur, Ut terrls, vobls : etiam persona secunda In primo numero Quartas Prassentis, ut audi* : Composita a vis, sis : malls, nollsque, vellsque. (Sed ris Pra?teriti et persona secunda Futuri Activae Vocis recte communis habetur ; Feceris, addideris, tuleris. ) Et nomina produc Crescentis longa est penultima queis Genitivi, Ut Samnls : itidem Simols, gratlsque, forlsque. | 215. R. XV. — Producuntur in Os : ut ventos atque sacei-dds. Obs. Corripienda tamen quag Grasci corripiunt, ut Phasidds, Argds, epds. Sic compos et impds, ds, exds. R. XVI. — Corripiuntur in Us : ceu tempus, amamits, et intus. Obs. Hinc Quartae casus contractos excipe, ut artus: Longaque crescentis penultima queis Genitivi, Ut tellus incusque, juventus atque senectus : Producta a Graecis, ut Sapphus atque Melampus, Atque piis cunctis venerandum nomen Iesiis. H. XVII. — Corripiuntur in Ys : chelys ut, chlamys, Othry^ Erinnys. Not. — Ducit ab Auctorum scriptis ea syllaba tempus, Regula quam longam nulla brevemve facit. DE METEORUM LEGIBUS. DEFINITIONES. § 216. 1. In proferendis syllabis Arsin voca Elation em vocis (huic Ictus comes) ; Thesisque contra vocis est depressio. Pes syllabarum est certa consecutio : Pedumque certa consecutio Rhythmus: ^ Apud poetas Versus est nomen Rhythmi : Certumque Versuum ordinem Carmen voca Metrum\e : et audit certa pars Versus Metrum. § 2 17 2. Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus : u - Quod si longa brevi praecesserit, ille Trochavis : - ^ Pyrrhichius brevibus voluit consistere binis : ^ w 134 PROSODLE Spondeus binis voluit consistere longis : — JPactylus efficitur longa brevibusque duabus : - s> u Postque breves binas Anapcestus simplice longa : ^ w - Tribrachyn hue brevibus formatum subjice ternis. o v Mot. 1 . — Quern Thesis incipiat, dices ascendere Rhythmum : Quale tuus specimen versus, Iambe, dabit : Coeperit ex Arsi contra, descendere dices ; Dactyle, tu talem, tuque, Trochae, facis. Sot 2. — Metrum in Dactylico carmine singuli, At bini in reliquis constituunt pedes. tht. 3. — Complendis metris cui syllaba deficit una, Hie Versus Catalecticus audit. Complendis metris cui deerit syllaba duplex, Ille Brachycatalecticus audit. Syllaba cui superest completis unica metris, Versus Hypercatalecticus audit. Cui nihil aut deest aut superest, teres atque rotundus Versus is Acatalecticus audit. DE SCANSIONE ET FIGURIS SCANSION! S. § 218. Scansio, | quam varija con|cinnant | arte Fi|gurse, D istr ibu | it Ver | sum | pro rati | one Pe | dum. A. Vocalem elidit Synalcepha in limite vocis, Si Vocalis erit subnexae in limine vocis ; Phyllid? am! \ an? ali\as : nam \ me dis\cedere \Jlevit (pro Phyllida, amo, ante.) Obs. 1. Interdum legem Synaloepha? infringit Hiatus : Ter sunt j cona\tl im\ponere \ Pelio \ Ossam. Obs. 2. Heu, 0, et ah nunquam vocalis proxima delet. B. Ecthlipsis Vocalem atque m de limite trudit, Si Vocalis erit subnexae in limine vocis ; O cu\ras homirf | O quant' \ est in \ refais in\ane. (pro hominum, quantum.) § 219. C. Syllaba de binis conflata Synceresis audit, Ut monstrant deest, dein, aureos, alvearia, Thesei. Obs. Apud poetas jura consonantium Subinde sumit / vel U: " Fluviorum rex Eridanus. Labat ariete mums. Genua tremunt. Pectunt et tenuia veUera Seres." D. Una sed in binas divisa Dicer esis audit . Quod tibi Naiades monstrant llavique Suevi ; Obs. Ponitur U pro V : siliias, soluitque videbis* COMPENDIUM. [f5.3 § 220 E. Ante pedum finem Ccesura vocabula iinit * " Lumina, labentem || ccelo |j qua ducitis annum." — Yirg Ohs. Quam fecit natura brevem, vocalis in Arsi Longa fit interdum, Caesura Ictuque faventc : " Pectoribus || inhians spirantia consulit exta." F. Secernit vocemque pedemque Dialysis una : " Lumina || labentem ccelo qua? || ducitis || annum." Not. — Ultima communis censetur syllaba versus. DE VERSIBUS DACTYLICIS. I. DE HEXAMETRO SIVE SENARIO DACTYLICO 1 221. Hexameter pedibus senis concluditur: horum Dactylus est quintus : sexta statione locatur Spondeus ; reliquisque locis reperitur utervis. Ohs. 1. Quintaj sede lo|cat re|rum gravidas spon|deam. Obs. 2. Hexametrum Caesura solet distinguere, qua pes Tertius aut quartus [| sese || discernit in Arsi. ( Obs. 1.) Post Thesin interdum Caesura est unica Versus ; " Impiger, iracundus, \\ inexorabilis, acer." — Hon. (Obs. 2.) Damnaris versum, Caesura qui vacet omni. Obs. 3. Emcit Hexametri de more disyllaba finem Sive tvi syllaba vox, raro polysyllaba, raro, Altera ni praeeat, claudit monosyllaba versum. Obs. 4. Ultima perraro sorbetur syllaba versus : Quod quum contingit, turn versus Hyperm&ter audit i " Omnia j Mercuri\o simi\lis y vo\cemque co\loremque, Et cri\nes fla\vos et \membra de\cora ju\vent ilia sede sede; fors nova tuta parum est. TRANSLATIONS or THE LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. §17. Poema, a poem, n. Mare, a sea, n. Leo, a lion, m. Natio, a nation, f. Caro, flesh, f. Ordo, order, m. Virgo, a virgin, f. Homo, a man, c. Nemo, no man, c. Turbo, a whirlwind, m. Ligo, a spade, m. Maeedo, a Macedonian, m. Lac, milk, n. Sol, the sun, m. Mel, honey, n. Fel, gall, n. Ren, fAe kidney, m. Sindon, ^/me /men, f. Halcyon, a kingfisher, f. Lumen, light, n. Pecten, a com6, m. Calcar, a spur, n. Jubar, a sunbeam, n. Par, a pair, n. Far, meu/, n. Career, a prison, m. Ver, spring, n. Pater, a father, m. Imber, a shower, m. Itgr, a journey, n. LatSr, a oncA, m. Honor, honour, m. Arbor, a free, f. iEquor, a smooth surface (s°a), n. Mann or, marble (sea), n. Cor, the heart, n. FulgQr, lightning, n. Kbtir, toorjr, n. leciir, the Utxct, XL .'Etas, age, f. Vas, a vessel, t*, Vas, a surety, m. Mas, a wa/e, m. As, a pound, m. Gigas, a giant, m. Elephas, an elephant, m. Adamas, adamant, m. Nubes, a c/onc/, f. Miles, a soldier, c. Hospes, a Aoa£, or guest, c. Satelles, a body-guard, c Merges, a sheaf, f. Seges, standing corn, f. Interpres, an interpreter, c. Teges, a ?na£, f. Quies, resf. £ Obses, a hostage, c. Prase's, a president, c. Pes, a foot, m. Merces, Air«i, t Heres, an heir, c. iEs, copper, n. Prass, a surety, m. Avis, a 6z>rf, f. Amnis, a river, m. Lapis, a stone, m. Cassis, a helmet, f. Tigris, a , f. Pars, a part, f. Frons. a 7ea/, f. Glans, an acorn, f. Trabs, a beam, £ Stirps, a trunk, £ Hiems, winter, £ Calebs, a bachelor, m. Municeps, a burgess, £ Princeps, a cfo'e/, c. A uceps, a fowler, c. Caput, a head, n. Pax, peace, f. Fax, a torch, f. Judex, a judge, c. Vindex, a/i avenger, c. Index, an informer, c. Ilex, scarlet oak, f. Carex, sedge, £ Vibex, a wea/, f. Vervex, a wether, m. Nex, rfea^A, f. Lex, £ait', £ Grex, a flock, m. Remex, a rower, m. Senex, aw old person, c. Supellex, furniture, f. Cornix, a crow, f. Calix, a cup, m. Fornix, aw arch, m. Strix, a screech owl, i. Nix, snow, £ Vox, « voice, f Nox, night, £ Nux, a walnut-tree, f. Lux, 7^/jf, f. Conjux, a spouse, c. Phryx, a Phrygian, m Lynx, a /t/wx, in Arx, a citadel, £ § 21. (Dant) The following nouns make (im pro em) im instead of em (Accusativo) in the Accusative case ; (i pro e) and i instead of e (in Ablativo) in the Ablative: buris, a ploughtail ; cucumis, a cucumber; amussis, a carpenter's rule; ravis, hoarseness; sitis, thirst; vis, force ; (et) and tussis, a cough ; (et) and (flumina) names of Rivers (qua? claudit is) which end in is ; (ut) as Albis, the Elbe ; Liris, the Garigliano ; Tiberis, the Tiber.* (Sumunt) The follow- ing take (im vel em) either im or em (Accusativo) in the Accusative case, (i vel e) and either i or e (in Ablativo) in the Ablative : neptis, a grand-daughter ; febris, a fever ; messis, a harvest; clavis, a key; puppis, a ship's stern; pelvis, a pan ; restis, a rope ; navis, a ship ; securis, an axe ; turris, a tower ; (adde his) add to these, sementis, seed-time; (atque) and strigilis, a flesh-brush.^ * Also some nouns of Greek origin in is ; as, Syrtis, Charybdis, poesis. •f The following nouns sometimes have Abl. Sing, in i : amnis, anguis, avis, civis, classis, finis, fustis, ignis, unguis, imber, supellex. Notica ruri, in the country ; vesperi, at eventide 140 TRANSLATIONS OF THE (Neutra) Neuter Nouns (quae exeunt) which end (in a/, ar, e,) in al, ar, and e, (gaudent) prefer (fingere) to form (t Singularis Ablativi) i in the Ablative Singular, (ia Plu- ralis Nominativi) and ia in the .Nominative Plural. (His excepta sunt) From these are excepted (in ar) the following in ar : baccar, a kind of plant ; nectar, nectar ; jubar, a Sunbeam ; far, corn or meal, (Quaa efferunt) Those which form {ium pro urn) ium instead of um (Plurali Genitivo) in the Genitive case Plural (sunt) are, 1. (i formantia Ablativo) Nouns forming i in the Ablative Singular ; 2. (non crescentia Genitivo) Nouns not increasing in the Genitive case ; 3. (pleraque) most Nouns (in x vel s) ending in x or s (positis post consonantem) fol- lowing a consonant*; 4. (cum aliis Monosyllabis) with othei- Nouns of One Syllable ; mas, a male ; mus, a mouse ; nix, snow ; nox, night ; os, gen. ossis, a bone; cos, a whetstone; sal, salt ; sol, the sun ; cor, the heart ; pax, peace ; glis, a dormouse ; lis, strife ; (et) and dos, a dowry, (His excipi- enda sunt) From these must be excepted (quae urn libenter efFerunt) the following, which prefer to form um : vates, a prophet, prophetess, poet, or poetess ; senex, an old man ; pater, a father ; panis, bread; (et) and accipiter, a hawk; (et) and canis, a dog ; frater, a brother ; mater, a mother ; juvenis, a youth; (et saepius) and generally apis, a bee; volucris, a bird.\ § 70. (Viri) Names of Men, (Populi) names of Peoples, (et) and (Divi) names of Gods, (Venti) names of Winds, (Menses) names of Months, (Montes) names of Mountains, * Many nouns in ns either take or reject I in Gen. PL, as, parens, parentium, or parentum. So all Present Participles. Nouns in as atis, is itis, ax acis, ix, icis, often form Gen. PL in ium ; as civitas, civitatium. Several monosyllables and other noun? of this Declension fluctuate in the formation of the Gen. PL, and the student must observe the usage of writers. ■)• All Adjectives following the 3d OccL form Ace Sing. Masc. in em. Parisyllabic adjectives form Abl. Sing, in i; as, tristis, tristi ; impari- syllables in i or e ; and of these, Participles and Comparatives prefer e ; others i, except a few which take e ; as dives, pauper, sospes, superstes. Adjectives of this Declension form Nom. PL Neut. in m, except the Comparatives, and vetus, Vetera. And those which form Nom. in ia form Gen. PL in mm, except celer, dives, inops, pauper, and some others. Memor, uber, degener, have no Neut. PL, and form Gen. PL in .tin. LATIN RULES aND EXAMPLES. 141 (Rivi) names of Rivers, (sunt) are (Generis Masculini) of the Masculine Gender. (Plan tee) Names of Plants, (Divae) names of Goddesses, (Feminae) names of Women, (Terras) names of Countries, (Urbes) names of Cities, (Insula) names Of Islands, (sunt, are (Generis Feminini) of the Feminine Gender. * (Yox indeelinabilis) Any undeclined Word (est) is (Neutrius Generis) of the Neuter Gender. (Sunt) The following are (Communis Generis) of the Common Gender : civis, a citizen; hostis, an enemy ; juvenis, a young person ; testis, a witness ; judex, a judge ; artifex, an artizan ; auctor, an author ; exsul, an exile ; opifex, an artificer ; comes, a companion ; heres, an heir ; hospes, a guest or host; dux, a leader ; obses, a hostage ; interpres, an interpreter ; con - jux, a husband or wife ; incola, an inhabitant ; sacerdos, a priest or priestess ; vindex, an avenger ; adolescens, a young man or woman ; infans, an infant ; index, an informer ; parens, a parent ; praesul, a president ; par, a mate ; custos, a guardian; municeps, a burgess; satelles, a body-guard ; bos, an ox or cow ; miles, a soldier ; vates, a seer or poet ; augur, a soothsayer; grus, a f>rane ; canis, a dog ; tigris, a tiger ; serpens, a serpent : sus, a swin<> ; (jungimus) we add dama, a deer; talpa, a rnole.\ § 71. (^ et t) Words ending in a and e (sunt) are (Feminina) Feminine ; (as et es) words ending in as and es (sunt) are (Masculina) Masculine. (Masculorum nomina in a) The names of Males ending in a (sunt) are (Masculina) Masculine : (ut) as, nauta or navita, a sailor ; verna, a slave born in his master's house ; (et) and poeta, a poet ; scurra, a buffoon ; scriba, a notary ; (et) and propheta, a prophet. * Winds follow the Gender of ventus, months of mensis, mountains ol mons, rivers of fluvius, plants of arbor. Some rivers are Fern., as Styx, Lethe, Allia. Many names of Mountains are Fern., asOssa, (Eta, iEtna, Ilhodope, Alpes, &c. ; some Neuter, as Soracte, Pel ion. Some names of Plants are Masculine, as oleaster, a wild olive ; some Neuter, as siler, a withy. Some names of Cities are Masculine, as Sulmo, Selinus ; and those in ;', as Delphi, Veii ; some Neuter, as Tibur, Anxur, Tarentum, Preneste. f Those names of Animals which are found in only one gender are. called Epiccena ; and the words mas or femina must be used when it is necessary to distinguish the sex : as Masc. passer, a sparrow ; passer fe- mina, a hen-sparrow; Fern, vulpes, a fox ; vulpes mas or mascula, a dog- fax. 142 TRANSLATIONS OF THE § 72. {Us et er) The terminations us and er belong (Masculinis) to Masculine Nouns ; {urn) the termination um (tribuitur) is assigned (Neutris) to Neuter Nouns. (In us) The following Nouns in us (Feminina sunt) are Feminine : alvus, the belly ; arctus, the Bear constellation ; carbasus, canvass ; colus, a distaff; humus, the ground ; me- thodus, a method* Virus, poison ; pelagus, the sea; (Neutra) are Neuter. Vulgus, the common people, (fere sit) may generally be (Neutrum) Neuter : (subinde) now and then (fit (Masculum) it is made Masculine. § 73. (Masculis) Among Masculine words (inseritur) is placed (quod claudit o, or, os, vel er) any Noun which ends in o, or, os, or er ; (et) and (Nomen) any Noun (desinens in es) ending in es, (si) if (flectit casus impares) it forms im- parisyllabic cases [that is, if it increases in the Genitive case Singular], (Ula) Those Nouns (quae desinunt in do et go) which end in do and go (Feminina sunt) are Feminine ; (sed) but (manent) the following remain (Masculina) Masculine : cardo, a hinge ; ligo, a spade ; ordo, order ; (atque) and margo, a margin, (In io) Nouns in io (sunt) are (Feminina) Feminine : (ilia) those (tantum) only (Masculina) are Masculine, (quae) which (vel spectabis) you may either see (oculis) with your eyes (vel tu tractabis) or you may touch (manibus) with your hands, f Caro, gen. c&rms, flesh (mavult) prefers (addere se) to be added (Femininis) to Nouns feminine. (Pauca in or) A few Nouns in or (sunt Neutra) are Neuter : aequor, the level of the sea or of a plain ; ador, parched corn ; marmor, marble, or the smooth sea ; cor, the heart. Arbor, a tree, (est Femininum) is Feminine. Cos, a whetstone, (et) and dos, a dowry, (sunt Feminina) are Feminine: (utrumque os) the two words, os ossis, a bone ; and os oris, a mouth ; (Neutra) are Neuter, i (Multa in er) Many Nouns in er (sunt) are (Neutra) Neuter : verber, a stripe ; siler, a withy ; acer, a maple ; ver, spring ; tuber, a wen ; uber, a teat ; (et) and cadaver, * Also, vannus, a winnowing -fan, is fem. f As papilio, a butterfly ; scipio, a staff. Numerals in io are masc ■s ternio, senio. % The Greek words chaos, epos, melos, are Neuter. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 143 a carcass; piper, pepper ; iter, a journey ; (et)and papave*, a poppy, (JEs), brass or copper^ (est neutrum) is neuter ; (sex in es) six Nouns in es (quae) which (flectunt casus impares) form imparisyllabie cases (sunt) are (Feminina) Feminine : compes, a fetter ; teges, a matj merces, reward, hire; merges, a cornsheaf ; quies, rest ; seges, standing corn.* § 74. (Inseras Femininis) You must place among Femi nine words (quae claudunt is, x, aus, et as) those which end in is, x, aus, and as, (s cum consonante nexa) in s imme- diately following a consonant, (es aequaliter inflexa) and es forming parisyllabic cases [that is, not increasing in the Genitive case Singular]. (Multa) Many Nouns (quae claudit is) which end in is (sunt) are (Masculini Generis) of the Masculine Gender : amnis, a river; axis, an axle ; callis, a path ; collis, a hill; caulis, a stalk; cucumis, a cucumber; (et) and follis, o leathern bag or bellows ; fascis, a bundle ; funis, a rope , fustis, a cudgel; finis, an end or boundary; ignis, fire; orbis, a circle ; (atque) and crinis, hair ; panis, bread , piscis, a fish ; postis, a doorpost; ensis, a sword; sentis. a bramble ; corbis, a basket ; torquis, a chain ; mensis, a month; torris, a firebrand ; unguis, a nail or talon; (et) and canalis, a conduit ; vectis, a lever ; vermis, a worm ; (et J and sodalis, an intimate companion ; cassis, a net ; cinis, ashes ; glis, a dormouse ; (et) and anguis, a snake ; lapis, a stone ; pulvis, dust ; (atque^ and sanguis, blood, f (Pleraque) Most Nouns (quae claudit ex) which end in x ^Masculina sunt) are Masculine, (ut) asgrex, a flock; (sed) but (manent) the following remain (Feminina) Feminine ; nex, death ; supellex, furniture ; ilex, the scarlet oak ; carex, sedge; lex, a law. If. (In ix) The following in ix (Masculina sunt) are Mascu- line : fornix, an arch or vault ; phoenix, the fabulous bird so called; (et) and calix, a cup.§ (In as) The following words in as (Masculina sunt) are * Ales, a bird, is Common. f Anguis, callis, corbis, cinis, pulvis, torqiis, are sometimes Feminine. Casses, nets, is Masculine ; cassis, idis, helmet, Feminine. { Faex, forfex, forpex, vibex, are Feminine. Cortex, imbrex , obex, pumex, rumex, silex, are sometimes Feminine. § Bombyx, onyx, are Masculine ; also the parts of the As in i, a- quincunx. 144 TRANSLATIONS OF THE Masculine : vas, vadis, a personal surety ; gigas, a giant ; elephas, an elephant ; as, assis, a Roman coin and weight ; mas, a male ; (et) and adamas, adamant ; (Neutra) the fol- lowing are Neuter ; vas, vasis, a vessel ; nefas, si?i ; fas, right. ( Adde) Add (Masculinis) to Masculine words : mons, a mountain ; fons, a fountain ; (et) and torrens, a torrent ; gryps, a griffin ; (et) and pons, a bridge ; rudens, a cable ; hydrops, dropsy; dens, a tooth; (et) and bidens, a two- pronged fork ; oriens, the east ; occidens, the west ; (et) and tridens, a trident* (In *s) The following in es (Masculina sunt) are Mascu- line ; verres, a boar-pig ; (et) and acinaces, a scimitar. § 75. (Neutra claudunt) Neuter words of the 3d declen- sion end in a (et) and e, ar, ur, us, c, I, n, (et) and t. (In ur) The following words in ur (Masculina sunt) are Masculine : furfur, bran ; turtur, a turtle-dove ; vultur, a vulture ; fur, a thief (In us) The following in us (Masculina sunt) are Mascu line : lepus, Gen. leporis, a hare ; (et) and mus, a mouse. (In us) The following in us (Feminina sunt) are Femi- nine: virtus, virtue; (atque) and servitus, slavery ; juven- tus, youth; incus, an anvil; (atque) and palus, a marsh; senectus, old age ; tellus, earth; (atque) and salus, health; (quibus u) in which u (manet longa) remains long (in transitu Genitivi) in passing to the Genitive case. (Et) Also pecus, Gen. pecudis, a beast, (est) is (Feminini Generis) of the Feminine Gender. (In I) The following in / (Mascula sunt) ar3 Masculine : mugil, a sea-mullet; consul, a consul; sal, salt; sol, the sun ; (atque) and pugil, a pugilist. (Masculina sunt) The following are Masculine: ren, a kidney ; splen, the spleen ; pecten, a comb ; delphin, a dol- phin ; attagen, a woodcock. (In on) The following in on (Feminina sunt) are Femi- nine : Gorgon, a Gorgon ; sindon, muslin ; halcyon, a king- fisher. § 76. (In Quarta) In the Fourth Declension (tribuimus us) we assign the termination us (Masculis) to Nouns Mas- culine ; (Neutris u) the termination u to Nouns Neuter. (Quartae in us) The following of the Fourth Declension in us (Feminina sunt) are Feminine : domus, a house ; porticua, * The parts of the As in ns are Masculine ; as, triens, quadrans. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 145 a porch ; acus, a needle ; Idus, the Ides in a Roman month ; (atque) and manus, a hand ; tribus, a tribe ; nurus, a daugh- ter-in-law ; socrus, a mother-in-law ; anus, an old woman, § 77. (Inseres Femininis) You will place anion » Femi- nine words (Nomina Quintae) Nouns of the Fifth Declension (in es) ending in es. • Dies, a day, (est) is (in Singulo) in the Singular Number (mas) Masculine (vel) or (Femininum) Feminine ; (in Plurali Numero) in the Plural Number (semper) always (Masculi- num) Masculine. § 78. (Singularis Numerus) The Singular Number (deest) is wanting (multis Nominibus) to many Nouns : (ut) as, manes, the spirits of the dead ; loculi, a purse ; penates, household deities; cunse, a cradle; thermae, warm baths; nugae, trifles ; grates, thanks ; arma, arms ; viscera, bowels ; magalia, cottages ; (cum deum Festis) with Festivals of the gods, (ut) as, Floralia, the festival of Flora.* * The following is a further list of Substantives wanting the Singular Number: — FIRST DECLENSION. Mince, threats. Minutiae, details. Angustiae, straits. Argutiae, refinements. Bigae, a chariot and pair. Clitel las, panniers. Deliciae, deliqht, daintiness. Divitiae, riches. Epulae, a feast. Excubiae, a night watch, Exequiae, a funeral. Exuviae, spoils. Facetiae, pleasantries, Feriae, a holiday. Habenae, reins. Induciae, a truce. Inferiae, offerings to the dead. Insidiae, an ambush. Lapidicinae, a stone quarry. Nundinae, market-day. Nuptiae, a bridal. Phalerae, horse-trappings. Prestigiae, jugglery. Primitiae, first-fruits. Quisquiliae, rubbish. Reliquiae, remnants. Salebrae, roughnesses. Salinae, a salt- work. Scalae, a staircase. Scopse, a besom. Tenebrae, darkness. Tricae, intricacies, trifles. Valvae, folding-doors. Vindiciae, a claim, defence. Also Calendae, the Calends ; Nonae, the Nones of a month ; Athenae. Thebae, Syracusae, with other towns. Can cell i, a lattice, Cani, white hairs. Codicilli, writing tablets. Fasti, annals. Fori, the hatches. SECOND DECLENSION. (a) Masculine. Inferi, the Gods below. Liber i, children. Posteri, posterity, Superi, the Gods above. 146 TRANSLATIONS OF THE (Multa) Many Substantives (quae) which (carent Plnrali) are destitute of a Plural Number (apparent) appear (lecti- tantibus) to students. * (Nonnulli Casus) Some Cases (absunt his) are wanting to these Nouns : fas, right; frugis, fruit ; dapis, a feast; opis, help ; vis, force ; (et) and (multa) many Nouns (praeter hrec) besides these (apparent) appear, (quae) which (carent* are destitute of (Casibus nonnullis) some Cases.f (6) Neuter. Lamenta, lamentations, Munia, duties. Prascordia, the midriff. Tesqua, wild places. Bellaria, dainties. Crepundia, toys. Cunabula, a cradle. Exta, entrails. J usta, funeral offerings. Also names of People and Places, as Volsci, Delphi, Leuctra, &e THIRD DECLENSION. (a) Masculine and Feminine. Fores, a door. Lemures, goblins. Majores, ancestors. Minores, posterity. Proceres, nobles. Antes, the rows of vines. Cervices, the neck (also sing, in poetry). Ccelites, the Gods above. Fides, a lute (also sing, in poetry). Also names of People, Places, &c, as Brigantes, Cyclades, &c (6) Neuter. Brevia, shallows. Mcenia, city walls. FOURTH DECLENSION. Artus, limbs. Idus, the Ides. * Among the many words which are not used in the Plural Number, notice: — (1) Materialia: as, aurum, gold ; argentum, silver; lac, milk t sanguis, blood. (2) Abstracta : as, letum, death; senectus, old age; fames, h unger ; pietas, piety. (3) Collectiva : as, vulgus, the common people ; supellex, furniture. (4) And the following : aer, the atmosphere ; osther, the sky ; humus, the ground; pontus, pelagus, the sea; tellus, earth ; arvurn. time ; ver, spring ; vesper, evening. f Nouns defective in Case are numerous Those having only one case in a Number are called Monoptota ; those having two, Diptota ; three, Triptota, &c. (1) Many Nouns have only the Nom. and Accus. in one or both Numbers : — (a) Greek Neuters in os in Sing, and Plur., as melos, mele. (6) Fas, nefas, instar, nihil, necesse, opus (need), in Sing, only, having no Plur. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. H7 (Quae efferunt) Those which form (Numerum Pluralem) the Plural Number (in a vel i) in a or i (sunt) are : frenum, a bit ; carbasus, canvas; (et) and locus, a place* ; rastrum, a rake; sibilus, a hiss; (et) and jocus, a jest\ ; Tartarus, hell, (fit) becomes (in Plurali) in the Plural Number Tartara 5 ( et) and coelum, heaven, coeli. (Quaedam) Some Substantives (abundant Casibus) are (c) Rura, mella, farra, tura, murmura, metus, situs, spes, &c, in Plur., which form Sing, fully. (2) Many Verbals of the Fourth Decl. are used in Dat. Sing, or Abl. Sing, only ; as, Dat. despicatui, derisui, ostentui, &c ; Abl. injussu, rogatu, permissu, promptu, procinctu, natu, &c. (3) Various words are used in single Cases with an adverbial force ; as, Abl. noctu, gratis, ingratiis, fortuitu, &c. : Accus. infitias (ire), to deny ; (ad) incitas (redigere), to reduce to extremity; venum (tradere), to offer for sale ,• suppetias (ferre), to lend succours : Gen. dicis (causa), for form' $ sake ; nauci (facere), to hold cheap, &c. (4) Observe especially the following Defectives: — (Ambages, a circuit) has Abl. Sing, and full Plur. Astus, cunning, Nom. and Abl. Sing-, Nom. and Ace. Plur. (Cassis, a net), Ace. Abl. Sing, (both rare), full Plur. (Compes, a fetter), Abl. Sing., full Plur. ( Daps, a feast), has all but Nom. Sing., full Plur ( Ditio, sway), has all but Nom. Sing., no Plur. (Faux, a jaw), Abl. Sing., full Plur. Fors, chance, Nom. Abl. Sing., no Plur. (Frux, fruit), has all but Nom. Sing., full Plur. Grates, thanks, Nom. Ace. Plur. Inquies, restlessness, Nom. Sing. (Juger, an acre), Abl. Sing., Dat. Abl. Plur. ; other forms from ju« gerum, i. Mane, morning, Nom. Ace. Abl. Sing., no Plur. Nemo, nobody, Gen. nullius, Dat. nemini, Ace. oeminem, Abl nullo. (Obex, a bolt), Abl. Sing., full Plur. (Ops, help), Gen. Ace. Abl. Sing., full Plur. Pondo, pounds, indeclin. Plur. ( Prex, prayer), Abl. Sing., full Plur. ( Repetundae, sc. pecuniae, extortion), Gen. Abl. Plur. ( Spons, inclination), Abl. Sing. ( Verber, a stripe), Gen. Abl. Sing., full Tlur. Gen. vicis, Ace. vicem, Abl. vice, change, no Nom. S., full Plur. Vis, force, Nom. Ace. Abl. Sing., full Plur., vires, virium, &c. Frugi, the old Dat. of frux, is used Adjectively ; as, homo fruglf ar honest man. So nequam, worthless, is of all cases. * Loca, spots; loci, spots or places in books, topics, f Ostrea, an oyster ; PI. ostreae and ostrea 148 TRANSLATIONS OF THE redundant in Cases: (ut) as, domus, a house; laurus, a laurel; CEdipus, CEdipus.^ * Declension of Domus : — Plural domus. dorauura or domorum. domibus. domus or domos. domibus. Singular. Nom. Domus. Gen. Domus. Dat. Domui. Ace. Domum. Abl. Domu or domo. i The Gen. Domi is used to signify at home ; as, domi me», at my home. Laurus, cupressus, colus, ficus, pinus, follow the 2d Declension, but also take from the 4th the Cases in us and u; CEdipus, Gen. CEdipodis and (Edipi. There are many Substantives with a two-fold Declension; as, juventa and juventus ; vespera and vesper, eri (which forms Abl. ves- pero, vespere, or vesperi) ; duritia and durities, &c. Many Adjectives have also double forms, as bijugus and bijugis. Vas makes Gen. PI. vasorum, Dat. vasis. So anciliorum from ancile, a shield. Greek Nouns in ma, Gen. tisj have Dat. PI. lis ; as, poema, Dat. PI. poematis. The following Substantives change their signification in the Plural Number : — Sing, iEdes, a temple ; Aqua, water ; A ux ilium, help ; Bonum, a good ; Career, a prison ; Castrum, a fort ; Cera, wax ; Comitium, the Assembly-place ; Copia, plenty ; Epulum, a sacred feast ; Facultas, a faculty ; Finis, an end ; Fortuna, fortune ; Gratia, favour ; Hortus, a garden ; Impedimentum, a hindrance; Littera, a letter of the alphabet ; Ludus, play ; Lustrum, a term of five years ; Natal is, a birth-day ; Opera, exertion ; Opis (Gen.), help ; Pars, a portion ; Rostrum, a beak -, Sal, salt; Tabula, a bvuid i Plur. sedes, a house. aq use, medicinal springs. auxilia, auxiliary forces , bona, goods, effects. carceres, a starting-place. i castra, a camp cerae, a waxen tablet Comitia, the Assembly at Rome copiae, forces. epulce, a banquet. facultates, means. fines, boundaries. fortunse, the gifts of fortune, a for- tune. gratia?, thanks. horti, a pleasure-garden. impedimenta, baggage. litterse, an epistle, or literature. ludi, public games. lustra, lairs of wild beasts. natal es, origin. operae, workmen. opes, power, wealth. partes, a part in a play. rostra, the pulpit for speaking in the Roman forum (adorned with the beaks of captured ships), sales, wit. tabulae, writing tablet*. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 149 § 79.* (Verborum prima conjugatio) the first conjuga- tion of verbs, (cui o, as, are, terrainatio) the termination of which is o, as, are, (fit avi in Perfecto) becomes in the Pre- terperfect Tense avi ; (subjicit atum Supino) and makes its Supine end in atum. (Hinc excipienda sunt) From this rule must be excepted (quae efferunt) verbs which form (ui itum) ui in the Preter- perfect, and itum in the Supine. Present. Preterp. Supine. crepo, / utter a sound i crepui, crepituin. cubo, I lie down; cubui, cubitum. sono, /sound; sonui, sonitum. domo, / tame ; domui, domitum. veto, F forbid; vetui, vetitum. tono, / thunder ; tonui, tonitum. Seco, / cut ; secui, sectum. frico, 1 rub ; fricui, frictum. Juvo, I help ; juvi, jutum. lavo, / wash ; lavi, lotum ; (et vindicat) and it takes also lavatum. Do, I give ; d&di, datum. sto, I stand; steti, statum. Mico, / glitter, (dat Perfectum micui) makes its Preterperfect micui ; Plico, I fold ; (dat Perfectum plicui) makes its Preterperfect plicui ; (Mico fert) mico takes (nullum supinum) no supine; {atum dat vel itum Plico) Plico makes plicatum or plicitum. § 80. (Verborum altera conjugatio) the second conjuga- tion of Verbs, (cui eo, es, ere, terminatio) the termination of which is eo, es, ere, (fit uiin Perfecto) becomes in the Preter- perfect Tense ui, (subjicit itum Supino) and makes its Supine end in itum. (Hinc excipienda sunt) From this rule must be excepted (quae efferunt) Verbs which form (evi, etum) evi in the Pre- terperfect, and etum in the Supine ; (ut) as, Present. Preterp. Supine, neo, / spin ; nevi, netum. deleo, / blot out ; delevi, deletum. ( Adde his) Add to these : — fleo, / weep ; flevi, fletum. pleo, I Jill ; plevi, pletum. oleo, I grow i olevi, oletum.j" (cum Compositis) with their compounds. * Translate et, atque, ac, and ; dat, facit, format, efficit, makes; bus- sipit, vindicat, takes ; fit, becomes; stat, stands. f Aboleo, Sup. abolitum : adoleo (or adolesco), Sup. adult tun* 150 TRANSLATIONS OF THE (His) In the following, (Perfectum) the Preterperfect Tense (stat in di) stands in di ; (sum Supinum terminat) the Supine ends in sum : Present, prandeo, I dine ; sgdeo, I sit ; Preterp. prandi, sedi, Supine, pransum, sessum. video, / see ; vidi, visum. (Sed) But, spondeo, I promise ; tondeo, /shears spopondi, totondi, sponsum. tonsum. mordeo, 7 bite ; mSmordi, morsum. pendeo, I hang ; pependi, pensum. (His) In the following (Perfectum) the Preterperfect Tense (fit) is formed (in si) in si, (sum Supinum exigit) the Supine requires sum : , Present. jubeo, I command ; muiceo, / soothe ; (Itidemque) and similarly, mulgeo, I milk ; tergeo, 7 wipe ; ardeo, 7 burn ; rideo, 7 laugh; suadeo, 7 persuade ; maneo, 7 remain ; baereo, 7 stick ; (Sic et) So also, algeo, 7 am chill ; fulgeo, 7 shine ; (Item) also, urgeo, I push ; (Sed) But (his) in wanting. (Dant si et turn) These two make the Preterperfect in si, and the supine in turn : Preterp. jussi, mulsi, Supine, jussum. mulsum. mulsi, tersi, mulsum. tersum. arsi, arsum. risi, risum. suasi, suasum. mansi, haesi, mansum. hsesum. alsi, fulsi, these (Supinum) the Supine (deficit) is Present. Preterp. Supine. Indulgeo, I indulge; indulsi, indultum. torqueo, 7 twist / torsi, tortum. Sed (But), Augeo, I increase; auxi, auctum. frigeo, lam cold; frixi, lugeo, I mourn} ^ make ^. luceo, 7 shine J v ' (Sed) But (non generant) these three latter do not form (Su- pinum) a Supine. (Haec) The following (volunt) will have (vi suffici) vi to be added (Perfecto) to the Preterperfect Tense, (turn Supino) and turn to the Supine : — LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 151 Present Preterp. Supine Cilveo, I beware ; cavi, cautum faveo, 1 favour ; favi, fa u turn. foveo, / cherish ; fovi, fotum. moveo, / move ; movi, motum. voveo, / vow i vovi, votum. \ (His) In the following (ui stat) ui stands (in Perfecto) in the Preterperfect Tense, (turn Supinum terminat) turn is the termination of the Supine : Present, doceo, / teach ; Preterp. docui, Supine, doctum. inisceo, / mingle ; miscui, mistum. sorbeo, / suck in ; sorbui f, sorptum teneo, / hold ; tenui, tentum. torreo, 1 roast ; torrui, tostum. (His) In the following (Praeteritum) the Preterperfect (scribitur) is written (Passive) Passively, (Prsesens) the Pre* sent (Active) Actively : Present Preterp. Supine. audeo, / dare ; ausus sum. ga u deo, I rejoice ; gavisus sum. soleo, / am wont ; solitus sum. § 81. (Verborum tertia conjugatio) the third conjugation of Verbs, (cui o, is, ere, terminatio) the termination of which is o, is, ere, (dat Perfectum) makes its Preterperfect Tense (variae formae) of diverse form ; (turn vel sum) turn or sum (stat) stands (Supino) in the Supine. § 82. (Bo, po, habent) Bo and po have (psi additum Perfecto) psi to end the Preterperfect, (ptum Supino) and ptum the Supine : (ut) as, Present, nubo, / marry ; Preterp. nupsi, Supine. nuptum.J (Tamen) But, Present, rumpo, / break ; bibo, / drink ; Preterp. rupi, bibi. Supine, ruptum. bibitum. strepo, / roar / strepui, strepitum. (Sic declino co, go, ho, quo) I thus decline co,go, ho, quo ; (xi Perfecto) xi in the Preterperfect ; (ctum Supino) ctum in the Supine : (ut) as, * Paveo, pavi ; ferveo, ferbui. f Also sorpsi. J Lambu. / lick, Iambi : cumbo, 1 lie down, cubui, cubitum. TRANSLATIONS OF TEE Present. Preterp. Supine. (luco, Head; duxi, ductum. sugo, I suck ; suxi, suctum. rego, / rule ; rexi, rectum. veho, / carry ; vexi, vectum (^cojubet) Sco desires (vi subjici) vi to end (Perfecto) Preterperfect, (turn Supino) and turn its Supine : (ut) as, Present. Preterp. Supine. cresco, / grow ; crevi, cretum. suesco, / am habituated ; suevi, suetum. quiesco, / rest ; quievi, quietum. nosco, / know ; lovi, notum. * pasco, I feed; pavi, pastum. compesco, I restrain! compescui. posco, I require ; poposci. disco. I learn ; didici. Ico, I strike ; ici, ictum. vinco, / conquer ; vlci, victum. linquo, I leave ; llqui, lictum. Parco, / spare ; peperci, f parsum. Spargo, / sprinkle ; sparsi, sparsum. mergo, I dip ; mersi, mersum. tergo, I wipe ; tersi, tersum. Ago, I do; egi, actum. frango, / break ; fregi, fractum. tango, I touch ; tetfgi, tactum. pango, I covenant ; peplgi, pactum ; (sed Composta) but its Compounds make -pegi, -pactum. p ungo, I prick ; pupugi4 punctual. jungo, I join ; junxi, junctum. lego, / read or gather ; legi, lectum ; (compositum) when compounded (saepe lexi dat) it often forms lexi.§ Present. Preterp. Supine. Figo, I fix; fixi, fixum. fingo, I frame; finxi, fictum. pingo, I paint ; pinxi, pictum. stringo, 1 tie ; strinxi, strictum. (Do jubet) Do requires (si suffici) si to be joined (Perfecto) to its Preterperfect, (sum Supino) and sum to its Supine : * Of its compounds, agnosco makes Sup. agnitum ; cognosco, cog- nitum. f Comparco, comparsi. J Compounds of pungo make Preterp. punxl. § Of the compounds of lego, / gather, diligo forms dilexi ; intelligo inttllexi ; negligo, neglexi. The others form legi, as colligo collegi ; wo do the compounds of lego, / read, as perlego, perlegi. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 153 Present. Preterp. Supine. la-do, / hurt ; laesi, lsesum. (Verum) But, cedo, I yield ; cessi, cessum. (Sic) So, illido, 7" beat on ; illisi, illisum. divido, / divide ; divisi, divisum. (Flecte) Form (vertendo) by changing {do in di) do into di (quas exeunt) those which end (in ando, endo) in ando endo. * Present. Preterp. Supine. pendo, / weigh ; pependi, pensum. tendo. / stretch ; tetendi, tensum. (tamen) but, findo, / cleave i Hdi, fissum. icindo, / cut ; scidi, scissum, fun do, / pnur ; fudi, fusum. tundo, / hammer ; tutudi, tusum. cudo, I fashion ; cudi, cusum. cado, I fall ; cecidi, casum. ca*do, I beat or kill; cecldi, caesum. edo, I eat; edi, esum. Abdo, 1 hide ; addo, / add; condo, I store up ; credo, / trust ; obdo, I block up ; perdo, / lose ; reddo, / restore ; edo, / utter ; prodo, i* betray ; trado, / deliver ; vendo, / sell ; dedo, I give up ; (quae) which (composta sunt a do) are compounded of do, / give ; {-didi 9 -ditum, efferunt) form didi, -ditum : (ut) as, Present. Preterp. Supine. edo, edidi, editum. dedo, dedidi, deditum. flecto, I bend; flexi, flexum. necto, I twine; nexi, nexum. pecto, / comb ; pexif, pexum. peto, / seek ; petivi, petitum. meto, / mow ; messui, messum. mitto, / send ; misi, missum. verto, / turn ; verti, versum. J (Verbum) A verb (quod fit a sisto) which is formed from sisto (sufficit -stiti Perfecto) joins to its Preterperfect -stiti. § 83. {So, sivi, situm, fit) So makes sivi, situm ; (sic formatur) thus is formed : — • As scando, scandi, scansum ; defendo, defendi, defensum. f Also, nexui, pexui. j Sterto, / more, stertui. 154 TRANSLATIONS OF THE Present. Preterp. Supine. arcesso, / send for ; arcessivi, arcessitum. lacesso, / provoke ; lacessivi, lacessitura. viso, I visit ; visi, pinso, I pound; pinsui, pistum. * § 84. Texo, / weave, (stat) stands (unura in xo) the only verb in xo, (quod vindicat) which takes texui, textum. § 85. Lo, lui, turn : (sic flectitur) thus is formed Present. Preterp. Consulo, / consult i consului, occulo, I hide ; occului, (Sed) But, coio, I cultivate ; colui, molo, I grind ; molui, Supine. consultum. occultum. cultum. molitura. (A cello verba cellui) Verbs compounded from cello, impel, make cellui: (sed) but (conjugabis) you will form, Present, percello, I strike ; pello, / drive ; vello, / pluck ; fadlo, / deceive ; psallo, / sing or play ; sallo, / salt ; Preterp. perculi, peptili, velli and vulsi, fefelli, psalli, Supine, perculsum. pulsum. vulsum. falsum. sal sum. Tollo, / raise, (formatum) formed in the Preterperfect sustuli, (fit) becomes (in Supino) in the Supine sublatum. (Mo, mux, mitum fit) mo forms mui> mitum ; (ut) as, Present. Preterp. fremo, / bellow ; fremui, gemo, I groan ; gemui, tremo, / tremble ; tremui, (Supino carens) Which has no supine. como, / deck ; comsi, promo, I prodttti} promsi, (Sic flectuntur) So are formed, sumo, I take; sumsi, demo, I take away; demsi, (Sed) But, emo, / buy ; emi, premo, I press ; pressi, Supine, fremitum. gemitum. comtum. promtum. sumtum. demtum. emtum. pressum. (Latini) Latin writers (saepe ponunt p) often interpose p (inter met* vel I) between m and s or t (Sic fiunt) Thus are formed sumpsi, dempsi, demptum, comptum, promptum, sumptum, emptum, &c. * Also pinsum. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 155 Present. Preterp. Supine - Cano, 1 sing; cecini, cantum ; (composita) its compounds make ■ ■cinui, -centum. pono, I place ; posui, posituro* gigno, 1 beget ; genui, genitum. temno, / despise ; temsi, or tempsi, tern turn. sterno, I strew ; stravi, stratum. sperno, / despise ; sprevi, spretum. cerno, / discern ; crevi, cretum. Jino, I anoint ; levi, l*tum. si no, / allow ; sivi, sltum. verro, / brush / verri, versum. curro, I run ; cucurri, cursum. quaero, 1 seek ; quaesivi, quassitum. tero, / rub ; trivi, tritum. uro, / burn ; ussi, ustum. gero, / cany on ; gessi, gestum. fero, / bear , tuli, latum. sero, / sow, or plant sevi, satum. Sero (dat) makes serui, sertum, (si stat) if it stands (cum vi nee* teridi) with the meaning of joining. 86. Facio, / make ; feci, factum. jacio, / cast ; jeci, jactum. (Dant a lacio) Compounds of lacio, / lice ; make lexi, (Et a specio) and compounds of spexi, specio, / spy ; fodio, / dig ; fugio, I fly; capio, / take ; rapio, I snatch ; pario, / bring forth ; cupio, 1 desire ; quatio, I shake ; fodi, fugi, oepi T> rapui, peperi, cupivi, lectum.* spectum. fossum. fugitum. captum. raptum. partum.f cupitum. quassum. (Sed) But (in Compositis) in the Compounds (dat) it forms § 87. (Uo format) Uo forms ui, utum: (ut) as, Present, tribuo, I afford; Preterp. tnbui, Supine. tributum.J ( Vo inflectit) Vo forms vi and utum : (ut) as, solvo, / loose, or pay ; volvo, / roll ; solvi, volvi, solutum. volutum. * As allicio, allexi : but elicio, elicui, elicitum. j- Fut. Part, pariturus. J ltuo, Sup. riitum ; Fut. Part, niiturus. 156 TRANSLATIONS OF THE (Tamen) but, Present. Preterp Supine. Fluo, I flow; fluxi, fluxum. struo, I build ; struxi, structum. vivo, / live ; vixi, victum. stinguo, I quench; stinxi, stinctum. § 88. (Verborum quarta conjugatio) the fourth conjuga- tion of Verbs, (cui io, is, ire, terminatio) the termination of which is io, is, ire, (fit) becomes (in Perfecto) in the Preter- perfect Tense ivi, (Supino itum sufficit) and makes its Su- pine end in Itum. Present. Preterp. Supine. Sancio, / ratify ; sanxi, sanctum : (nee respuit) nor does it reject sancivi, sancitum. vincio, I bind; vinxi, vinctum fulcio, I prop ; fulsi, fultum. sarcio, 1 darn ; sarsi, sartum. farcio, I stuff ; farsi, fartum. amicio, I clothe; arnicui, amictura. salio, / dance ; salui or salii, sal turn. At (but) singultio, I sob ; singultivi, singultum. sepelio, / bury ; sepelivi, sepultum. venio, / come ; veni, ventura, veneo, / am soldf ; venii, _ sepio, I fence in ; sepsi. septum. aperio, / open ; aperui, apertum. comperio, I find out ; comperi, compertum, reperio, I find ; repperi, repertura. haurio, / drain ; hausi, haustum. sentio, I perceive ; sensi, sen sum. § 89. (Flexeris) You must form (Deponentia) Deponent Verbs (ex regulis) according to the rules (Activorum) of Active Verbs : (nam) for (Praeteritum Passivum) the Pre- terperfect Passive (est) is (Derivativum) a Derivative (Supini) of the Supine. Present. Preterp. (1.) Reor, / think ; ratus sum misereor, I pity ; misertus sum.} fateor, / confess ; fassus sum : (flecte sis) form (-fessus in Compcsitis) -fessus in the Compounds. (2.) Labor, I fall; lapsus sum. utor, J use ; usus sum. * Only known in its compounds distinguo, extinguo. "f Veneo is from venuin-eo, as vendo from venum-do. i Also miseritus sum, LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 157 Present. Preterp. loquor, / speak ; locutus sum. 9equor, I follow ; secutus sum. nitor, / strive , nisus, or nixus, sum. irascor, / am angry ; iratus sum. queror, / complain ; questus sum. gradior, / step ; gressus sum. patior, / suffer ; passus sum : (et) and (-pessus in Compositis) ~pessus in its Compounds ulciscor, / avenge ; ultus sum. apiscor, / acquire ; aptus sum. (Sed) but adipiscor, /acquire; adeptus sum. proficiscor, / go ; profectus sum. expergiscor, I awake ; experrectus sum. obliviscor, I forget ; oblitus sum. comminiscor, 1 imagine ; commentus sum. * (Sed) but nanciscor, I find ; nactus sum. paciscor, / covenant ; pactus sum. morior, I die ; mortuus sum.f nascor, / am born ; natus sum. orior, / arise ; ortus sum. J (Queis Futura) The Future Participles of which last three Verbs are moriturus, nasciturus, oriturus. (Quarta?) of the fourth conjugation, Present. Preterp. Metior, / measure , mensus sum. ordior, / begin ; orsus sum. At (but) experior, I try ; expertus sum. opperior, I wait for; oppertus sum. § 90. (Flexeris) You must conjugate (Inceptiva) Incep- tive Verbs (ducta a Verbis) derived from Verbs (ut Primi- tiva) as their Primitives ; (sic) thus Present. Preterp. exardesco, I begin to blaze; exarsi (from ex, ardeo). obsolesco, I grow out of date; obsolevi (from obs, oleo). tremisco, / begin to tremble ; tremui (from tremo). rescisco, / begin to know ; rescivi (from scio). * Comminiscor, and reminiscor (which has no Supine), are Conr pounds of an obsolete verb meniscor. f Morior, Infin. mori, and sometimes moriri. J Orior is partly declined after the 3d Conjugation, partly after the 4th. Pres. Orior, ore'ris, oritur, orimur, &c. But Infin. Oriri -, Imperf. Conj. Orirer. So Potior, / obtain. Pres. Potior, potiris and potens, potltur and potltur, &c. Imperf. Subj. Potirer and poterer, potireris and potSreris, &c. Preterp. Potitus sum. Infin. Potiri. 158 TRANSLATIONS OF THE {Ui terminus) Ui is the termination (Perfecto) to the Preter perfect (factorum) of those formed (ex Nominibus) from Nouns : (sic) thus, Present. # Preterp. evanesco, / vanish ; evanui (from e, vanus). consanesco, I get well ; consanui (from cum, sanus). (Plurima) Very many (carent Supinis) have no Supines ; (multis) in many (Perfecta) Preterperfects (non apparent) do not appear.* (tiexeris) you must form (Impersonalia) Impersoxial Verbs (ex regulis) according to the rules (Personalium) of Personals. Present. Preterp pudet, it shames ; puduit.f poenitet, it repents ; poenituit. But, miseret, it affects with pity; misertum est.f libet, it pleases ; § libuit and libitum est. ta?det, it wearies , pertaesum est and tanluit. piget, it irks ; pigitum est and piguit.|| (In operibus Latinis) in Latin works (apparent) ap- pear (lectitantibus) to readers (multa Verba) many Verbs • The following are the only Inceptive Verbs which have Supines : — Abolesco, adolesco, obsolesco, exolesco, coalesco, congelasco, exar- desco, concupisco,convalesco, indolesco, obdormisco, inveterasco, scisco, revivisco. The following have neither Supine nor Preterperfect : — <3£gresco, arboresco, albesco, ditesco, dulcesco, grandesco, hebesco, herbesco, ignesco, incurvesco, juvenesco, mitesco, mollesco, pinguesco, plumesco, puerasco, silvesco, sterilesco, tenerasco, fatisco, augesco. hisco, labasco, renidesco. Most of the others have Preterperfects, but no Supines, "f Or puditum est. J Or miseritum est. § Also written lubet. Its compound is collibet, collibuit, and collibi- tum est. || Add also licet, it is lawful, licuit and licitum est. Pudet and licet have the Active Future Participles, puditurus, lici- turus. Pudet, piget, pcenitet, have Gerunds and Passive Participles in dus, pudendi, &c, pigendi, &c, poenitendi, &c. Many Verbs have the 3d Person Singular used impersonally : as, de- lectat and juvat, it delights ; constat, it is acknowledged ; praestat, it is better ; restat, it remains ; apparet, it appears ; accidit, contingit, it hap- pens ; sufficit, it is enough ; even it, it comes to pass ; expedit, it is expedient ; tonat, it thunders / pluit, it rains ; a/^' numerous others. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 159 (quag carent Supinis) which have no Supines, (multa quae Perfecto) and many which have no Preterperfect. * § 91. (Converteris) You must change {a in e) a into e (horum in Compositis) in the Compounds of the following Verbs : arceo, / exclude ; carpo, / crop ; damno, / condemn ; Jacto, I entice ; fatiscor, / am weary ; fallo, 1 deceive ; farcio, / stuff; jacto, / toss or boast; gradior, / step ; patior, 1 suffer ; partior, / divide ; tracto, / treat ; pario, / bring forth; patro, I perform \ (atque) and cando, I inflame ; sacro, / devote ; spargo, / sprinkle ; (atque) and scando, 1 climb, f (Converteris) You must change (a in i) a into i (horum in Compositis) in the compounds of the following Verbs : ago, / act ; cado, / fall ; cano, / sing ; frango, / break ; habeo, I have ; lateo, I lie hid ; fateor, I confess ; pango, 1 * The Verbs which have no Supines are : — The Compounds of nuo and gruo (as abnuo, injjruo) ; the Compounds of cado (except occido); Neuter Verbs in -veo, as paveo ; Neuter Verbs in -eo, -ui (except caleo, careo, doleo, jaceo, lateo, mereo, noceo, oleo, pareo, placeo, taceo, valeo); also, algeo, timeo, urgeo, lugeo, fulgeo, frigeo, turgeo, luceo, strideo, ango, clango, disco, posco, compesco, dego, lambo, niico, refello, metuo, psallo, respuo, tremo, sapio, gestio, ineptio, and some others. The Verbs which have neither Preterperfect nor Supines, besides the Inceptives, are : — Desiderativa in -urio (except parturio, esurio) ; also, asgreo, flaveo, caneo, hebeo, scateo, liveo, renideo, polleo, vegeo, humeo, aveo, lacteo, moereo, ambigo, furo, ferio, labo, vergo, plecto, vado, reminiscor. diffiteor, lingor, medeor, vescor, liquor, liquet, and some others f Arceo : comp. coerceo, exerceo. Carpo . . decerpo, excerpo, discerpo. Damno . . condemno. Lacto . . delecto, oblecto. Fatiscor . . defetiscor. Fallo . . refello. Farcio . . confercio, differcio, infercio, refercio. Jacto . . disjecto, objecto, &c. Gradior . . aggredior, congredior, egredior, ingredior, praB- gredior, progredior, trausgredior, digredior. Patior . . perpetior. Partior . . dispertior, impertior. Tracto . . attrecto, contrecto, detrecto, obtrecto. Patro . . impetro, perpetro. Cando . . accendo, incendo, succendo. Sacro . . consecro, desecro, exsecro, obsecro. Spargo . adspergo, conspergo, dispergo, inspergo, respcrgo, Soando . • adscendo, conscendo, descendo, transcendo. 160 TRANSLATIONS OF THE fasten ; salio, T dance or leap ; statuo, I decree ; (atque) and tango, / touch ; capio, / take ; rapio, / snatch ; sapio, / am wise; facio, I do ; jacio, / cast; lacio, / entice ; placeo, 1 please ; taceo, / am silent. * (Excepta) The following are excepted : perago, I perform ; perplaceo, I please thoroughly ; (et) and facio, I do, (mistunj cum Adverbiis) compounded with Adverbs. (Convertito) Change {a in u) a into u (ex) in Verbs compounded of calco, / tread ; salto, / dance ; quatio, 1 &hake.\ (Converteris) You must change (e in i\ e into i (horum in * Ago : comp. abigo, adigo, exigo, transigo, ambigo. But cir- cumago, perago, satago : (-egi, -actum). Cado --. . accldo, concido, decido, excido, incido, occld< procido : (-cidi, -casum). Cano . • accino, concino, occino, praecino, recino. succino (cinui, -centum). Frango . . confringo, diflfringo, effringo, infringo, perfringo, pra3fTingo, refiringo : (-fregi, -fractum). Habeo . . adhibeo, exhibeo, inhibeo, perhibeo, prohibeo. But posthabeo. Lateo • . deliteo. Fateor . confiteor, profiteor, diffiteor: (-fessus). Pango . compingo, impingo, oppingo: (-pegi, -pactum). But repango. Salio . adsilio. So circumsilio, desilio, dissilio, exsilio, insilio, praesilio, prosilio, resilio, subsilio, tran- silio : (-silui or -silii, -sultum). Statuo . . constituo, destituo, instituo, restituo, substituo. Tango • . attingo, contingo, pertingo : (-tigi, -tactum). Capio . • accipio, concipio, decipio, excipio, incipio, percipio praecipio, recipio, suscipio: (-cepi, -ceptum). Rapio • abripio, arripio, corripio, deripio, diripio, eripio, praeripio, proripio, surripio : (-ripui, -reptum). Sapio . . desipio, resipisco. Facio • . afficio, conficio, deficio, efficio, inficio, perficio, prasficio, proficio, reficio, sufficio : (-feci, -fecturo). But benefacio, malefacio : (feci, factum). Jacio . • abjicio, adjicio, conjicio, disjicio, ejicio, injicio, oh- jicio, projicio, rejicio, subjicio, transjicio ; (-j-icif jectum). Lacio • . allicio, elicio, illicio, pellicio. Placeo . • displiceo. But perplaceo, complaceo. Taceo . . conticeo, reticeo. f" Calco : comp. conculco, inculco, proculco. Salto . . adsulto, exsulto, insulto, resulto. Quatio . . decutio, discutio, excutio, incutio, percutio, recutio, succutio : (-cussi, -cussum). LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 161 Compositis) in the Compounds of the following Verbs : egeo, I want ; teneo, / hold ; (atque) and emo, I buy ; specio, / tpy ; sedeo, / sit ; (atque) and premo, / press ; (adde) add dedi, / gave ; (atque) and lego, / gather ; (adde) add steti, I stood ; (atque) and rego, 1 rule* (Sunt excepta) The following are excepted: relego, 1 read again ; perlego, / read through ; (et) and praelego, 1 read publicly, (Si) If (mutato Simplici) the Simple Verb being changed (Composti Praesens) the Present Tense of the Compound Verb (sumsit i) has taken i, (sumet e) it will take e (in Per- fecto) in the Preterperfect, (si) if (valet) it is able (fingered to make the vowel (longam) long : (sic) thus, Present. Preterp, deficio, I fail ; defeci. projicio, I throw ; projeci. conspicio, I behold; conspexi. dirigo, I direct ; direxi. pergo (per-rego), / proceed ; perrexi. surgo (sus-rego), / rise ; surrexi. porrigo (pro- rego), I stretch ; porrexi. f (Composta) The Compounds (a) fromqugero, I seek ; caedo, I beat or kill; (et) and (a) from laedo, / hurt; (mutant) change {ce in i) ce into i. f * Egeo : comp. indigeo. Teneo . . attineo, contineo, detineo, distineo, obtineo, per- tineo, retineo, sustineo : (-tinui, -tentum). Emo . . adimo, dirimo, eximo, interimo, perimo, redimo : (-emi, -emtum). But coemo, demo (for de-imo). Specio . . adspicio, conspicio, despicio, dispicio, inspicio, per spicio, prospicio, respicio, suspicio: (-spexi, -spectum). Sedeo . assideo, consideo, desideo, dissideo, insideo, obsideo, prsesidco, resideo : (-sedi, -sessum). Premo . . comprimo, deprimo, exprimo, imprimo, opprimo, perprimo, reprimo,supprimo : (-pressi, -pressum). Lego, I\ . colligo, deligo, diligo, eligo, intelligo, negligo, se- gather J ligo. The Compounds of Lego, / ready keep e. Rego . . corrigo, dirigo, erigo, &c. : (rexi, -rectum), f This rule applies only where the Simple Verb has e in the Stem- syllable of the Preterperfect, as in the examples given. When the Stem- vowel is not lengthened in the Preterperfect, i is kept, as continui : also when the Stem-vowel of the Simple Preterperfect is not e, as illisi. J Queero : comp. acquiro, conquiro, disquiro, exquiro, inquiro, per- quiro. Caedo . . accido, concido, decido, excido, incldo, occlfic, prarcldo, recldo, succldo. M 162 TRANSLATIONS OF TlxSL Plaudo, I applaud, (convertit) changes au in o) au into o : claudo, I shut, (commutat) changes {au in u) au into u : obedio, / obey, (solummodo) only (ex audio) compounded from audio, I hear, (dat au in e) changes au into e.* (Reduplicatio) The Reduplication (Simplicis)of the Simple Verb (exibit) will disappear (a Compositis) from the Com- pounds : (sic) thus (a) from pello, I drive away, pepuli, (fit) comes im pello, / impel, impuli. (Sed) But (Composta) the Compounds (a) from disco, 1 learn ; posco, / require ; do, 1 give ; (et) and (a) from sto, / stand ; (servant) keep the Reduplication, f § 92. (Praepositio cum) The Preposition cum (fit con-) becomes con- (quando stat compositum) when it appears in Composition. Ambi, re, se, sus, (et) and dis (stant tantum) appear only (in Compositis) in Compounds.! (Praepositio) A Preposition (saspe mutat) often changes (terminantem consonantem) its final consonant (sic) in such a way (ut fiat) that it may become (similis) assimilated (con- sonanti Simplicis) to the first consonant of the Simple Verb . (ut) as, ad-fero (fit) becomes affero. obpeto becomes oppeto in-lino . . illino. (Convertite) Change (n in m)n into m (ante b vel ante p) before b or p: (ut) as, con-bibo (fit) becomes combibo in-plico becomes implico. (Alia aliae transferunt) Other Prepositions make other changes (quae) which (longa sunt relatu) are long to recount. Laedo . . allido, collldo, elldo, illicit). (The 1 of these Compounds remains in the Preterperfect ; as, acquis! vi, occTdi, elisi. ) * Plaudo : comp. complodo, explodo, supplodo. But applaudo. Claudo . . concludo, discludo, excludo, includo, intercludo, occludo, praecludo, recludo (-clusi, -clusum). f Disco : comp. addisco, condisco, dedisco, edisco ; Preterp. -didici. Posco . . deposco, exposco, reposco ; Preterp. -poposci. Sto . . adsto, consto, exsto, insto, praesto ; Preterp. -stlti : circumsto, supersto ; Preterp. -steti. % Ambi, around, about ; re, again, back ; se, apart ; dis, in different jHirts or ways. Some grammarians think sus to be put for subs, under ; others form it from susum, for sursum, up ; which is more suitable to the sense of the words in which it is found, though the Participle sublatu*. from sustuli, affords an argument for the first opinion. LVTIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 163 (Do) I give (hoc unum) this single thing (notandum) to be remarked * : ab-fero (fit) becomes aufero. ab-fugio becomes aufugio. * The following are the changes of Prepositions in Composition : — - ( 1 ) A, ab, abs, from. A, before m and v ; as, amitto, averto. Abs, before c and t ; as, abscedo, absterreo : shortened into as before p, as aspello, asporto. Ab, before other letters. But note, aufero, aufugio. (2) Ad, to. Unchanged before vowels, and before h,j, m, v ; as, adeo, adhibeo, adjungo, admiror, advoco. Becomes ac before qu; as, acquiro. Assimilated before the other consonants ; as, accedo, attero : but may remain unchanged before most of them; as, adfero or affero, adsumo or assume (3) Con, for cum, with. Becomes com- before 6, m, p; as, com- bibo, commoveo, compoho. Assimilated before I, r ; as, colludo, corrumpo. Becomes co before vowels and h ; as, coaiesco, cohasreo ; except comedo. Unchanged before the other consonants ; as, concutio, tonvoco. Observe cognosco. (4) E, ex, out of. Ex, before vowels, and before c,p, q, 8, t; as, exeo, excludo, expungo, exquiro, exsculpo, extraho. Assimilated before/; as, efrundo. E before the other consonants ; as, educo, eniteo. (5) In, in, into, towards, against, upon. Becomes im before b, m, p ; as, imbibo, immitto, impello. Assimilated before I and r ; as, illudo, irruo. Unchanged before other letters; as, ineo, incumbo. Observe ignosco. (6) Ob, over-against. Assimilated before c,f, g, p ; as, occurro, oflfero, oggannio, oppono : unchanged before other letters. But note obsolesco, ostendo. (7) Sub, under (secretly). Assimilated before c, f, g, m, p, r ; as, succumbo, sufficio, suggero, summoveo, suppono, surripio : but some- times remains unchanged before these letters ; as, subrideo, subruo. Un- changed before vowels and the other consonants ; as, subeo, subtraho. (8) Trans, across, beyond. Becomes tra in a few Verbs; as, trado, trano. Tran before s ; as, tran-scribo. Unchanged before other letters. (9) Ambi, around, about. Becomes amb before vowels ; as, ambeo Am before/?; as, amplector. An before c, q,f; as, anquiro, anfractus, (10) Dis, di, in different parts or ways. Dis before c, p, q, s, t ; as, discumbo, displiceo, disquiro, disseco, distraho. Assimilated before/; as, differo. Before j sometimes dis ; as, disjicio : sometimes di ; as, dijudico. Before other consonants, di ; as, dimoveo. But disrumpo and dimmpo. (11) Re, again, back. Unchanged before consonants; as, requiro. Becomes red before vowels ; as, redarguo. Buttman considers red the original form of this preposition (as also sed of se, prod of pro) ; whence reddo for re-do ; re-cidit for red-cldit ; rettuli, reppuli, repperi, for red- tuli, red-puli, red-peri. (12) Ante, before ; circum, around j de,from, (down) ; inter, among, be- tween ; per, through ; prae, before ,• pro, for, instead of (forward) ; post, after .• praeter, beside ; subter, beneath ; super, above ; se, apart ; sus, up, are unchanged in Composition. Except the following instances : anticipo, circuit, intelligo, pellicio, pelluceo. pejero. Note prodeo and prodigo for pro-eo and pro-ago. 164 TRANSLATIONS OF THE § 93. A. I. Adjectives, Participles, and Pronouno, agree with their Substantives in-gender, number, and case : as, No friend will* go to lost wealth. The- Substantive is- understood by Ellipse*: as. Most shun toil (Supply men.) Neuter Adjectives perform the-office of- Substantives : as, Death is last of-all things. II. A-finite Verb agrees with its-Nominative-Case in-number and person : as, All vices war against nature. Sometimes an-Infinitive, or some Phrase, is-put for the-Nomina- tive : as, To-lie is not mine, — How long life is going-to-be, is un- certain. The-Nominative of- Pronouns is-expressed seldom : as, We-lean always towards the -forbidden, and we-desire things-denied. Unless it-avail for- distinction or emphasis : as, / expelled kings ; ye bring-in tyrants. Impersonal- Verbs have not a-Nominative expressed : as, lt-irks and earnestly repents himself. The-Persons of-the-Verb sum (I am) often are-understood • as, Nothing (is)-good except what (is)-honourable. The-Infinitive sometimes is-put-after the-Nominative : as, Then pious JEneas began-to-tear-off the-robe from-his-shoulders. But the-Infinitive generally is-put-after the- Accusative, a-finite Verb going-before : as, Men-report (hat-Homer was blind. III. The-Relative agrees with its-antecedent f in-gender, num- ber, and person, but in-case it-is-construed with its-own sentence * as, That is the-pleasantest friendship, which resemblance of-characters has- coupled. B. A-Substantive, Singular in form but not in-meaning, often has a- Verb, an-Adjective, or a-Relative, plural : as, Part load the-tables with -viands. — The-Tegeatan youth come-up slow to-the- succour. Two or more singular Nouns generally have an-Adjective, Verb, or Relative, plural : as, Hannibal and Philopwmen were tuken-ojf by-poison. The-plural Verb agrees generally with the-Nominative of-the- worthier Person : but the- Adjective or Relative with the-Noun of- the-worthier Gender. The-First Person is worthier than the-Second, the- Second thaD the-Third : as, If thou and Tullia are-well t I and Cicero are-well. In things having-life the-Masculine Gender is worthier than the- Feminine : as, My (literally, to-me) father and mother are dead. * Ellipsis (ellipse) is a Figure of Syntax which leaves out some word or words belonging to the regular construction of the Sentence. f The Antecedent of the Relative is that word or those words to which the Relative is referred. LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 165 But in things without-life, the-Adjective or Relative wili-bs most-frequently in the-Neuter Gender : as, Riches, honour, glory, are placed within your-view. (literally, eyes,) Copulative Verbs*, sum (I-am) fio (I-become) videor (I-seem) vocor (I-am-called), with the-like, whether of-a- Finite or Infinitive Mood, have the-same case on-either-side : as, A-long syllable placed-' after a-short, is-called Iambus. — I-am-acknowledged a-royal boy by established tokens. — It-is-allowed you to-be happy ! A- Verb, placed between two Nominatives, sometimes agrees with the-latter alone : as, The-quarrels of -lovers are the-renewal of-love. A-Relative placed between two Substantives of-the-same thingf, often agrees with the-lattei alone : as, Thebes, which is the-capital of-Bosotia. To-a- Substantive, Pronoun, and sometimes to- a- Sentence, a-Substantive of-the-same thing J may be-put-in- Apposition in the-same case : as, Riches, incentives of-evils, are-dug-out (of the earth). — We consuls are-wanting. — Let-him-refiect (that) an-orator is -being -formed, a-dijjicult matter. When two Substantives of-different things come -together, one is -put in the- Genitive- Case : as, Reclining under the-cover of-a- beech-tree. § 94. C. I. Verbs Transitive govern an-Accusative of-the- nearer Object : as, Despise pleasures. — In-the-frst-place, worship God. Some Neuter and Passive Verbs admit an-Accusative of-their- own operation §: as, He-serves a-hard slavery. — Claudius played hazard. Some Verbs, especially those of-asking and teaching, have a- double Accusative : as, We-all demand of -thee peace. — Why now should- 1 -teach thee letters, O-ass ? Most of these- Verbs keep the-Accusative of-the-thing in the- Passive Voice : as, She-delights to-be-taught Ionic movements. The-Accusative of-respect in-the-Greek manner is-placed-after Neuter and Passive Verbs as-well as Adjectives : as, He-quivers with-his-ears and trembles in-his-limbs.—(She is) all dyed with- redness in-her-tender cheeks. — They -are naked as-to-their arms. * See § 101. j That is, which are both used to define the same person or thing \ as, Animal and hominem : Thebae and caput. $ By a Substantive of the same thing is meant one which expresses the same person or thing in another character or by another title, for the purpose of definition or explanation. § Called the Cognate Accusative 166 TKANSLATIONS OF THE These Prepositions govern an-Accusative : Ante (before), apud (at, with, among), ad (to, at), adversus (over-against, towards), cir- curn (around), circa (around, about), citra, cis (on-the-near-side-of), contra (against, over-against), inter (between, among), erga (towards), extra (out-of), infra (beneath), intra (within), juxta (near), ob (on- account -of, before), penes (in-the-power-of), pone (behind), post (behind, after, since) prater (beside, beyond, except), prope (near), propter (bn-account-Of, nigh), per (through, by), secundum (after, along, according to), supra (above), versus (towards), ultra (beyond), trans (across). To-these add super (above, over), subter (beneath), and in (into, towards, to, upon, against, &c), sub (under, about) if motion takes-place. II. The-Vocative, the-Case of-one-called, is-governed by an- Interjection either expressed or understood : as, Son, or, O Son. The- Interjections en and ecce (lo!) govern the- Accusative and the-Nominative ; O, ah, heu, hem, proh (alas), the Accusative, the- Nominative, and the- Vocative : as, Lo a-wretched man! — Lo a-neio disturbance and quarrel! — Alas pitiable boy! — Alas {for) human emptiness! — Thc-honour of -gods and men forfend! — Holy Jupiter forfend ! Hex and vce (alas!) govern a-Dative : as, Alas me wretched! — Woe-to-thee, pleader ! III. Almost all Adjectives and Verbs, also Adverbs and Sub- stantives, govern a-Dative of-the-remoter Object, for-the-sake of- which something is or is-done : as, We-wish to-be rich not only for* our selves. — For-me in-yon-place (there-is) neither sowing nor reap* mg. — Numa chose virgins for- Vesta. — For-the-ciiy he-is a father, and for-the-city a- husband. Accordingly sum signifying possessively has a-Dative of-the-pos- sessor: as, For there-is to-me (i. e. I have) a-f other at-home; there* is (i. e. I have) a-cruel stepmother. Very-many Adjectives, Adverbs, and Verbs govern a-Dative, sometimes even Substantives, by which is-signified advantage, communication, comparison, consecration, agreement, habit, help, and fitness, kindness, nearness, pleasantness, affinity, delivery, indulgence, demonstration, promise, trust, and narration, compli- ance, command, and whatever (is) contrary to-these ; together with nubo (I -marry), vaco (I-am-at-leisure-for) : other- instances will- stand under the-First Rule : as, LeUhim-be serviceable to-his- country, useful to-the-felds. — A-poet is bordering -on an-orator. — A-multitude burdensome to peace, and hostile to-quiet rest. — It-is proper-to-live agreeably to-nature. ^-He-lends a-patient ear to- cultivation. — What he-gives to-another, he 'takes -from himself. — (He) assured this to-me, and persuaded (me of it). — Fortune guarantees safety to-us. — Philosophy heals minds. — We-favonr thee. — I-am-wrath-with thee.—The-coruiueriug side pkwff-d the~ LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. lf>7 Oods, but the-conqnered (pleased) Cato. — Spare a-pious race. — A snake appeared to- Sulla sacrificing. — O beautiful boy, trust not too-much to-complexion. — Amassed money rules or serves each-man. — Wilt-thou-combat even a-love which- has-pleased ? — Venus mar- ried Vulcan. — I-give-my -leisure always to-philosophy . — (There is) no trusting to-partners of -sovereignty. Communis (common), similis (like), proprius (peculiar), par (equal), and alienus (foreign), and more-Adjectives, sometimes prefer a-Dative, sometimes a-Genitive : as, Middle-things are Hkest to-true. — Thiukesl-lhou (that) the- Gods are like thyself f — Activity of-mind is natural to-us. — To-speak ornamentally is the-property of-an-orator. Delecto (I-delight) ; juvo (I-help or please) ; jubeo (I-order) ; rego (I-rule) ; Icedo (I-hurt) ; guberno (I-govern) ; are-joined to-an- Aecusative contrary- to the-rule : as, The-camp pleases many. — Thou, O- Roman, remember to-rule the-nations with-thy-sway. Tempero and mnderor (I govern or restrain) hare a-Dative or an- Accusative : as, 2'his-person restrains horses, who (will) not restrain his-anger. Verbs compounded with the- Adverbs bene (well), satis (enough), male (ill), and with Prepositions, especially these, ad, ante, ab, in, iider, de, sub, super, ob, con, post, and pra>, generally govern a-Dative : as, I-satisfy the-rest always ; never myself (mihi ipsi). — Sicily formerly was -contiguous to- Italy. — The-giants waged war upon- the- Gods. — ( We) often put-under hens the-eggs of -ducks. Many of these vary their-construction : as, The-Hrlretii surpass the-remaining Gaids in-valour. — These faults exist in love. The-Dative of-the- Agent follows Verbal-Adjectives in bilis, and the -Gerundive in dus ; sometimes Perfect Participles, rarely Passive Verbs ; as, He died lamented by -many good-men. — Chr ernes remains, who is to-be- entreated by-me. — A-great citizen died and dreaded by-Otho.—Here I am a-barbarian, because I-am-undemtood not by-any-one. Passive Verbs and Participles generally have an-Ablative of-the- Agent with the-Preposition a or ab : as He-is-praised by these, he- is-blumed by those. — The-death of-Crassus was bewailed by many. The-Dative of-the-purpose is-added to-the-Verb sum. and many others, either for a-Nominative or for an- Accusative : as, The-antis for-a-pattem of -great toil. — I-have-lost the-kernel : he-has-left the- shclls for -pawn. Often a-double Dative is-admitted; as, The-greedy sea is a- destruction to-sailors. IV. The-Genitive of-the-possessor follows almost all Substan- tives, likewise the-Verbs sum (I-am) ; facio (I-make) ; fio (I- become) ; by the-Ellipse of- -Substantive ' as, The-propertiea of- 168 TRANSLATIONS OP THE individuals are the-riches of-the-st.te. — All-things which were thc- womaris become the mans, — Scipio made Spain of- Roman do- minion. Est Impersonal is-put-before a- Genitive, if nature, token, office or duty, is- understood : as, It-is (the-nature) of -any man to-err.— It-is (the-ioken) qf-a-dishonest man to-deceive by-a-lie. — It-is (the* duty) of-a-young-man to-reverence (his) elders (majores natu). An-Ellipse of-other Nouns also happens before a-Genitive : as, Hectors Andromache, (supply wife.) — Glaucus's Deiphobe. (supply daughter,) — We-had-come to Vesta's, (supply temple.) — I-see this* mans Byrrhia. (supply slave.) The-Personal Genitive concealed in the-Possessive Pronoun takes another Genitive agreeing-with itself: as, The -commonwealth wan preserved by -the -exertion of -me alone. — You-saw the-eyes of -me weeping. The-Genitive of- Quality follows Substantives : as, A-boy of-in* genuous countenance and ingenuous modesty. Quality is-put also in the-Ablative : as, An-old-man with-long beard, with-rough hair. Partitive words, Numerals, Comparatives, and Superlatives, govern a-Genitive, with-vvhich they-agree in-gender : as, Many of* these trees were planted by-my own hand. — I-am-charmed with-each of -you. — We -follow thee, holy -one of -gods. — Sulla lost a-hundred and-twenty of-his-men. — The-elder of-the-Neroes. — Bravest of-the- Gauls. — Of -mortals nobody is-wise at-all hours. — Least of -all. These Genitives, gentium, terrarum, and others, follow the- A^dverbs of-Place, hue (hither), eb (thither), quo (whither), ubi other-hand a-dropping of-the- voice is (called) Thesis. A-Foot is a-certain succession of-syllables, and Rhythm a-certain succession of-Feet. In-the-works-of poets the-name of-Rhy thm is a- Verse : and a-certain order of-Verses call Measure or Metre : also a-certain part of-a- Verse is-called Metre. § 217. 2. A-long syllable following a-short is called Iambus (^ -) : but if a-long-syllable goes-before a-short-one, that (is) a- Trochee (- ^) : a-Pyrrhich will consist of- two short-syllables (v, v,) : ^-Spondee will consist of-two long-syllables (--) : a,-Dactyl is- formed by-a-long and two short-syllables (~w) : and sm-Anapcesl by-one long after two short-syllables (w-). Add to-these a- Tri- brach formed by- three short-syllables, (y ^ ^). You-will-say that-a-Rhy thm, which a-Thesis begins, is-ascending ; a-specimen of-which-kind thy verse, O-Iambus, will-give. On-the- other-hand, if-it-begins with Arsis, you-will-say it-is- descending ; thou-makest such, O-Dactyl, and thou, O-Trochee. One foot makes a-metre in Dactylic verse, and two-feet in others That verse which wants one syllable for-completing its-metres, is-called Catalectic. That which wants two syllables for-completing its metres is-called Br achy catalectic. A-verse which (has) one syl- lable over, when-its-metres are-complete, is-called Hyper catalectic. That Verse, which has-nothing wanting or too-much, being-smooth and round, is-called Acatalectic. § 218. Scansion, which Figures adjust by- various art, distributes a- Verse according to-feet. A. Synalcepha (Elision) cuts- off a- Vowel at the-end of-a-word, if there-shall-be a-vowel at the-beginning of- the- following word : (as) I-love Phyllis before other-women : for she-wept that-I was-depart~ ing. Sometimes Hiatus violates the-law of-Synaloepha : (as) Thrice they -endeavoured to-place Ossa on-Pelion. A-following vowel never elides lieu, O, and ah (alas !). Ecthlipsis cuts off a-vowel and m from the-end, if there-shall-be a-vowel at the-beginning of-the-following word : (as) O the-cares of -men, O what-great emptiness there-is in things. § 219. C. One-syllable wrought out-of two is-called Synceresis, as deest (it is wanting), dein (next), aureos (golden), alvearia (hives), Thesei (of Theseus) show. In-the-works-of poets I and U sometimes take the-privileges of- consonants : (as) Eridanus king of -rivers. The-wall totters from- the-battering-ram. Knees tremble. And Serians comb light fleeces. D. But one-syllable divided into two is-called Diceresis, which Naiades and yellow-haired Suevi show to-you. U is-put for V . you-will-see siliias (woods) and solicit (he-hatli loosed). 182 TRANSLATIONS OF THE § 220. E. Ctesura ends words before the-end of-feet : (as) Ye> Lights which lead in- heaven the-gliding year. A-vowel, which nature has-made short, sometimes is-made long in Arsis, Caesura and Ictus helping: (as) Poring -over the-brea.sU he-consults the-palpitating entrails" F. Dialysis (Incision) separates both a-word and foot at-once * (as) Ye- Lights which lead in- heaven the-gliding year. Not. The-last syllable of-a-verse is-held common. § 221. The-Hexameter is-formed by-six feet : of- these the-fifth is a-dactyl : a-spondee is-put in-the-sixth place: andeither-of-the- two is-found in-the-other places. Gravity of-topics stations a-spondee in-the-fifth place. Caesura is-wont to-divide an- Hexameter, where the- third or fourth foot is separated at an-Arsis. Sometimes the-only Caesura of-a-verse is after a-Thesis : (as) " Active, passionate, inexorable, force." You-will-condemn a-verse which is-without any Caesura. A-word of-two-syllables or of-three-syllables, by custom, makes tiie-termination of-an- Hexameter, seldom a-word-of-more-than- two-syllables, seldom a-word-of-one-syllable, unless another go- before, closes the-verse. The-last syllable of-a-verse (is) seldom absorbed : when this hap- pens, the-verse (is) then called Hypermeter : (as) In-all-things like Mercury, both in-voice and complexion, and yellow locks, and graceful limbs of -youth. § 222. The- Pentameter has two parts : each commences with-two feet, which a-long syllable follows. A- Spondee and Dactyl enter the-first-part as-you-choose : the-second part rejoices only in- dactylic feet. Caesura separates the-first partof-a-Pentameterfrom-the-second: and Synalcepha is-excluded from that place: (as) Although he- prevails not in-genius, he-prevails in-art. A-word-of-two-syllables makes by custom the-end of-a-Penta- meter. Est may-be thrown to the-end, if Synalcepha takes place : (as) Thy letter was read with-unwilling eyes. Or if a-word of-one-syl- lable goes-before, as in this : If I-obtain those rewards by-my-zeal, it-is enough. Let-not a-word of-one-sy liable be the-end of- the-first part, unless a-word of-one syllable go-before, as in this : Yet there- is great hope in the- goodness of- God. Or sometimes a-word formed of-two short-syllables : (as) She secures to-Jupiter the -formidable sceptre without force. § 223. The- Hermc Muse rejoices in-Hexameters alone : Elegiet join -together Hexameters and Pentameters. Elegiac- Distichs prefer containing a-complete sense : nor is-it- LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 183 £Ood for-the-construction of-a-simple sentence to-be-divided into (separate) distichs. § 224. The goldfinch is a singing bird, but the acanthus blooms in the fields. The maple is in the woods ; the spirited horse gains an Olympic victory. The chief who carries arms on his shoulders is carried on the horse's flank. The wandering bee stores honey : Apis is an ^Egyptian god. The gad-fly harasses horses ; an asylum is wont to receive the wretched. He who engraves carves ; he who keeps things hidden conceals. You will sing with your voice : he ! lead dogs, unless you are white on the temples. Twined nets are set : the brazen helmet shines. Surround your head with the helmet : boars are caught by nets. Cedo (I yield) makes cessi (Preterperfect), cado (I fall) cecidi, ccedo (I beat) cecldi. A club strikes ; a nail holds firm, and a key opens. A maid carries a distaff, moist matter penetrates a strainer. The farmer tills fields, but strains thick wines. You strike close with a sword ; you fall by a spear thrown from a distance. That you may please a com- panion, put on, as a companion, affable manners. Comedians, seek the stage ; messmates, seek supper. Consult teachers, so you con- sult for yourself. Often has his own desire injured the man desirous of war. Songs are recited, while temples are being dedi- cated to the Lord. He trusted not to untie, who severed the knot with a sword. This man trains dogs to take them out soon against boars. If you have not money, you are destitute, and eat not delicacies. The sea often deceives one who relies too much on the clear surface. Fruits grow on trees, corn in the fields. The sun chases the clouds, and irrecoverable time flies. The swallow is a chirping bird : the leech swims, the reed is green in spring. By what a man sins, by the same the same man is soon punished. It is a difficult labour under the weight of which I sink. A boy's forehead is smooth, but a girl's tongue light. Seek hares in woods, elegancies in words. He is not bid for by me at a penny, who bids not for me at a penny. I had rather break with my jaw good apples than bad. Merchandise is sold, and reward comes gained oy toil. Sylvia strokes with loving hand, while she milks her cow. You will be dear to the Lord, if you have sent gold to the wretched Strive, little boy, whoever shalt desire to shine. She who is red, besmeared with paint, is forgetful of decency. He fell by base treachery, whom a friend killed. I wait for Caius, who is clad in dark dress. A mouth commands, but a bone is eaten with the mouth. It is a wife's part to bring forth and obey, a husband's to procure. Obedient children make parents rejoice. If you do not wish to be hanged, you will not refuse to pay your debts. Play at ball : a javelin is hurled ; plla is a pillar. Plaga is for a net and a country ; plaga for a blow. People are the citizens of a city : poplar is a tree. If you can avoid, drink not more than two cups. The prow is the front part (of a ship), the stern the hind part, and the keel the lowest. Thrashing ^nachines bruise grain; 184- TRANSLATIONS OF THE LATIN RULES. burrs are wont to injure the fallow. A bail promises, but a vessel contains food. A bail kindly assures the person, but a surety money only. If you wish to cross the waters of the sea, use sails. Trust, but first see ; he who trusts, and has not well seen, is de- ceived : therefore see, lest you be inveigled by trust. Tailors delight in shears, barbers in curling-irons : but a smith takes his red-hot work with tongs. The same fortune makes partners ; the same toil comrades ; the same duty colleagues : but school, play, the table, make dear companions. Lira is the furrow of a field : lyra (the lyre) touched utters notes. Let him not be secure, who is not safe from the enemy : you have banks by a river, shore by the sea. Men are old by time ; ancients lived formerly : I feign what is not, and dissemble what is. A hoof tramples : a talon tears, holds, clutches ; tenacious sedge grows in a pool, sea-weed in the sea. We properly intrench a camp, but hedge in a sheep- fold : a spear can be called rounded, a sphere round. Blot out what is written, but quench the flame of the lamp : the tongue tastes any food which has good flavour. The cuticle is on the flesh, the skin drawn from the body : man spreads a back : a beast has tergus (a back). A baker has an oven, stoves are warmed by a furnace : this mark of the grammarian was not known to me. Have you anything new ? Seek another : I know nothing. That chatterer relates what matters very little. If perchance you sit anywhere, and the seat is convenient to you, sit m that seat : per- haps a new one is hardly safe. APPENDIX. L GREEK NOUNS. 1. Greek Nouns of the First Declension in as, es, e. See § J 4., note. 2. Greek Nouns of the Second Declension in os,on. See § 15., note S. S. Greek Nouns Heteroclite, fluctuating between the Second and Third ^Declensions : — (i} Sing. N. Pele-tis or Pel-eus G. Pele-i or Pele-os D. Pele-o Ace. Pele-um or Pele-a V. Peleii Abl. Pele-o. (6) Achill-eus or Achill-es Achille-i, Achill-i, Achillas, or Achille-os Achill-i Achill-em, Achill-en. or Actiil- le-a Achill-eu or Achili-e Achill-e. (c) Sing. N. Thucydid-es (d) Pericl-es G. Thucydid-is or Thu- cydid-i Pericl-is or Fericl-i D. Thucydid-i Pericl-i Ace . Thucydid-em or Thucydid-en Pericl-em or Pericle-a V. Thucydid-e or Thu- cydid-es Pericl-es Abl . Thucydid-e. Pericl-e. 4, Greek Nouns entirely of the Third Declension: — »'*) Sing. N. Thal-es G. Thal-is or Thalet-i is D. Thal-i or Thalet-i Ace. Thal-em, Thai- -en, or Thai- eta V. Thal-e or Thai -es Abl. Thal-e or Thalet-t (b) Sing. N. Ech-o (c) Sapph-o G. Ech-us Sapph-us or Sapphon-is D. Ech-o Sapph-o or Sapphon-i Ace. Ech-o Sapph-o or Sapphor.-eca V. Ech-o Sapph-o Abl. Echo Sapph-o or Sapphon-g. 186 APPENDIX [d) Sing. N. Memn-on « JEth-er G. Memnon-is iEther-is D. Memnon-i iEther-i Ace. Memnon-em or M«v iEther-em or ^ther-a mnon-a Abl. Memnon-i*. M\:\ev-%. (/.)Sing. N. Thyrs-is GO Tiber-is (Roman word.) G. Thyrsid-is or Thyr- Tiber-is sid-os D. Thyrsid-1 Tiboi Ace. Thyrs-in or Thyr- Tiber-im sid-a V. Thyrs-1 Tiberis Abl. Thyrsid-e. Tiber-i (it) Sing. N. Nere-is (0 Erinn-ys G. Nereid-is or Nere- Erinny-is or Erin-ny-es. id-os D. Nereid-i Erinny-i Ace. Nereid-em or Ne- Erinn-ym, Erinn-yn, or Erin- reid-a. ny-a V. Nere-i Erinn-y Abl. Nereid-e. Erinny-e. Plur. N. Nereid-es Erinny-es G. Nereid-um. Erinny-um D. Nereid-ibus or Nereis- in Erinny-sin Acc. Nereid-es or Nereid-as Erinny-as V. Nereid-es Erinny-es Abl. Nereid-ibus or Nerei-sin. Erinny- anywhere. uspiam, J w nusquam, , , nnllibi, i Wmkm> u^eu} wherei/0UWiIL IV. ADVERBS. L Adverbs of Place. (1.) Rest in a Place. ubiubi, 1 wheresoever- (2.) Quo, whither ? eo, thither. eo, ") illuc, Ithi istuc, J iuc, hither modern, to I ilio, to anc I no, diquo, >c juopiaroj J hue, hither. eodem, to the same place. alio, to another place. quo, aliquo, \-anywhitfter. quopiaiBj ubicumque, J ubique, i , l } everywhere. passim, J * prope, near. procu I, far away. intus, *| ... . > within. mtrinsecus, J extrinsecus, "I tons, subtus, beneath*. superne, above. in feme, below. praesto, at liand. peregre, abroad. Motion to a Place. quoU^t,} "*"*" W,ria lit rov is, whither of the two you wiH J * l I J- whither soever. quoe unique, J intro, to with'n foras, to without. APPENDIX. 189 (3.) Motion towards a Place (versus or versum). Quorsum, whitherward ? illorsum, thitherward. horsum, hitherward. aliorsurn, towards another quarter. utraque versum, towards both quar- ters. aliquorsum, towards some quarter. quaque versus, or -um, towards every quarter. introrsum, inwards. deorsum, downward*. sursum, upwards. retrorsum, backwards, prorsus, straightforward. seorsum, sidewards. adversum, V , . . i y towards, aqai tst. adversus, J w dextrorsum, towards the right. sinistrorsum, towards the left (4.) Motion from a Place. Unde, whence ? inde, "1 illinc, > thence. istinc, J hinc, hence. utrimque, from both sides. indidem, from the same place. aliunde, from elsewhere. alicunde, from some place. undique, "| , „ . . ,. 1 > f)om all bides. undique versum, J J undevis, ~\from which side you undelibet, J will. undeunde, "1 - , . . , j J- from whatever side. undecumque, J f eminus, from far. cominus, from near, close. funditus, from the ground, utterly radicitus, "1 . , .... } from the roots. stirpitus, y ccelitus, from heaven. divinitus, from the gods. Qua, which way? iliac, \ihat way. istac, J hac, this way. utraque, both ways, eadem, the same way. alia, another way. aliqua, "1 j \ some way. quadam, J * Quando, when ? nunc, "1 , s > now. modo, J hodie, to-day. ' unc 'W turn, J neri, yesterday. pridie, the day before. (5.) Motion by a Way. qualibet, } ^ch way you wtU. utravis, which of the two ways yim will. \ which way soever. quacumque, J y recta, straight. dextra, to the right. sinistra, to the left. ti. Adverbs of Time. (1.) When? dudum, "j pridem, l some time bcuk. jamdudum, J nuper, lately. nudiustertius, three days tinev. ante hac, "\ ante, \ heretofore. antea J 190 APPENDIX. immediately, forthwith. jamdiu, long since- jam, now, presently. jamjam, directly. mox, "| } soon cito, J statim, confestim, ilicet, illico, protinus, eras, to-morrow. postridie, the following day. perendie, the day after to-morrow. post, postea, posthac, V afterwards, hereafter. postmodum, postmodo, nonnunquain, J aliquando, I sometime*. quandoque, J quondam,"! jt . . v, \. > some time ago or neroajter interim, interea, meanwhile. interdum, sometimes. unquam, ever. tandem, at length. quandocumque, whensoever alias, at another time. vixdum, 1 , > not yet. nondum, J 9 nunquam, never. semper, always. (2.) How long ? Quamdiu, how long ? diu, long. aliquamdiu, "1 , ., r .. ,. n > some length of time. aliquamtisper, J 9 J tamdiu, so long. tantisper, so long. adhuc, hitherto. in perpetuum, fir ever. Quoties, how often ? toties, so often. quotidie, daily. quotannis, yearly. aliquoties, several times. identidem, repeatedly. interdum, ~\ subinde, J denuo, afresh. [ now and then. (3.) How often? rursus, "1 > again. iterum, J v plerumque, usually. saepe, often. crebro, frequently. raro, seldom. semel, once. bis, twice. &c. &c. see §31. C. Adverbs of Order. Primum, primd, in the first place. deinde, in the second place. deinceps, next. porro, ~\ 5- moreover. praeterea, J insuper, moreover. tertio, thirdly. postrTmo, \M+h D. Adverbs of Quality, Manner, and Degrzh. (1.) Interrogative: as, cur, quare, quamobrem, why ? num, an, uhe~ ther ? quomodo, how ? &c. (2.) Qualitative : as, bene, well; male, ill; pulchre, beautifully fortiter bravely ; sapienter, wisely ; with many others derived from Ao\jective8. APPENDIX. 19 J (3.) Intensive: as, magnopere, maxime, very greatly ; magis, nutre ; multum, much ; oppido, perquam, valde, very ; lon^e, by far ; poth>sim am, prsecipue, praesertim, especially ; omnino, penitus, prorsus, wholly ; pot iiis, rather ; satis, enough ; nimis, nimium, too much, &c. (4.) Diminutive: as, parum, too little; ferme, fere, pene, prope, pro- pemodum, aknost ; paullum, paullulum, very little , paullo, by a little ; segre, vix, scarcely, &c. (5.) Limitative: as, duntaxat, modo, tantummodc, solum, tantum, only ; plerumque, generally, &c. (6.) Modal: as, adeo, ita. sic, so ; itidem, similiter, in like manner ; aliter, secus, otherwise, &c. (7.) Graduative : as, paullatim, sensim, &c, by degrees. (8.) Distributive: as, sigillatim, separatim, individually; partira, partly ; viritim, man by man, &c. (9.) Collective : as, pariter, simul, una, together* Sec. (10.) Affirmative : as, certe, etiam, ita, nae, plane, profecto, sane, utique, yes, truly, &c. (11.) Negative: as, haud, non, not, no ; nequaquam, haudquaquam, neutiquam, minime, by no means, &c. (12.) Dubitative : as, fors, forsan, forsitan, fortasse, fortassis, perhaps / forte, by chance, &c. (13.) Asseverative : as, pol, edepol, by Pollux; hercule, mehercule, by Hercules, &c. (14.) Definitive : as, nempe, nimirum, scilicet, videlicet, tc iv'.t, &<\ V. CONJUNCTIONS. A. Co-ORDINATIVE. (1.) Sociative : et, que, atque, ac, and ; etiam, quoque, item, also, neque, nee, nor ; et . . . et, both . . . and', neque . . . neque, neither . . . nor. (2 ) Adversative: at, ast, sed, autem, verum, vero, but; tamen, yet; attamen, verumtamen, but yet ; atqui, but indeed ; enimvero, verum enim- vero, but in truth. (3.) Dissociative : aut, vel, ve, or ; aut. . . aut, vel . . . vel, ve . . . ve, either . , . or. (4.) Causal: nam, namque, enim, etenim, for ; enimvero, for in truth. (5.) Conclusive: eo, ideo, idcirco, propterea, on that account ; itaque, ergo, igitur, therefore ; proinde, accordingly; quocirca, quamobrem, quare, quapropter, wherefore. B. SUBORDINATIVE. (1.) Local: ubi, where; unde, whence j quo, whither ; qua, in which direction; quatenus, how far. (2.) Temporal: quum, quando, ut, ubi, when; dum, donee, whitst, until; quoad, as long as, until ; priusquam, antequam, before; postquam, ut, after, since ; simul atque, as soon as ; quoties, as often as. (3.) Causal: quum, quoniam, quandoquidem, since; quia, quod, be- cause ; quippe, for that. (4.) Conditional: si, if; nisi, unless; sin, but if; dum, dumir via provided that ; sive, or if; seu . . . sive, whether . . . or. 192 APPENDIX. (5.) Concessive: etsi, etiamsi, tametsi, quarr/quam, quamvis, ut, licet, Mough. (6.) Final: ut, in order that; quo, that; ne, that ... not, lest ; ne*e, neu, and that . . . not, and lest ; quominus, but that, that . . . not. (7.) Consecutive : ut, so that ; quin, but that ; ^er£ . . . wo£. (8.) Comparative: ut, sicut, velut, ceu, as; tamquam, quasi, as if (9.) Conclusive: cur, quamobrem, quare, why, wherefore. (10.) Modal: quomodo, quemadmodum, quam, how, &c. (J 1.) Optative : utinam, si, O si, would that. VI. INTERJECTIONS. (1.) Invocative : O! heus ! ohe ! eho ! ehodum 1 O! ho! eja, cornel (2. ) Monstrative : en, ecee, lo ! (3.) Admirative • O! au ! hui ! hem 1 ehem ! vah 1 atat ! papaB ha! oh! (4. ) Jubilative : io 1 evoe 1 hurra ! eu 1 euge ! bravo ! well-done ! (5.) Lamentative : hei ! heu 1 eheu ! ah ! vae ! proh ! alas, woe's me I VII. ORTHOGRAPHY. TnE Orthography of the Latin language is very unsettled, on account of the uncertain etymology of many words, and the changes which took place from time to time in the manner of speaking and writing. The subjoined Table exhibits the preferable Orthography of some dis- puted words : — Write Write vaiietudo rather than valitudo. lacrima rather than lacryma. genitrix ; genetrix. caecus . . ccecus. deminutio . diminutio. maereo . . mcereo. ceteri casteri. sollers . solers. frenum • fraenum. sollennis . . solemnis. heres • haeres. Juppiter . Jupiter. levis • Ic-evis. quattuor . quatuor. prelum • praelum. rettuli . retuli. fecundus . foecundus. conjux . conjunx. femina fnemina. have ave. fetus foetus. ahenum . aenum. fenus • fcenus. exsul . . exul. suboles • soboles. letum . lethum. hiems • , hyems. sulfur . sulphur ocius • , ocyus. tus . . thus. si'iva • sylva. ancora . anchora. stilus stylus. vieesimus . . vigesimua. Sulla Sylla. Caius Gaius. satira • datura. Cnaeus Gn«us. elipeus • clypeus. obsonor . op so nor. A1T1SNDIX 19S VUL ON THE DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. Syllables, if possible, begin with a Consonant, and end with a Vowel. Hence — 1. A Consonant between two Vowels belongs to the latter syllable; as, pa-ter, a-ma-tur. 2. When two or three Consonants come between two Vowels, they all belong to the latter syllable, if they can begin a Latin or Greek word ; as, ma-gnus, a-gri, c-sca, pe-stis, astra, A-bdera, pu-blicus, Ara-chne, Pa-phlago, rhy-thmus t seri-psU asthma : if not, they are divided between the two syllables; as, an-nus, cur-ro tel-lus, an-te t pun-ctum, ar-ctus, jux-ta. Obs. 1. A compounded word is divided into the words which compose it ; as, ab-avus : unless the first element is a mutilated word, when it follows the general rule ; as, a-ni-madverto. Obs. 2. An euphonic letter between the Compounds belongs to the former syllable ; as, neg-otium, prod- est. But see § 94. N. 2. (\ ' > IX. SIGLAKIUM ROMANUM. Abbreviations used in the Latin Language. 1. VkM NOMINA. A. Aulus C. Caius Cn. Cnaeus D. Decimus. K. Ka>so L. Lucius M. Marcus M'. Manius. P. Publius Q. Quint us Ser. Servius Sex. Sextus. Sp. Spurius T. Titus Ti. Tiberius, 2. Titles. Cos. ConEul. Coss. Consules or Consulibus. Cos. Des. Consul Designatus. D. Divus. Imp. lmperator. P. C. Patres Conscripti. P. M. Pontifex Maximus. Proc. Proconsul. S. P. Q. R. Senatus Populusque Romanus. Tr. Pl. Tribunus Plebis. 3. In Voting on Trials and Elections. A. Absolve C. Condemno. N. L. Non liquet. A. P. Antiquam (legem) probo. V. R. Uti rogas. 4. On Tombs. F. C. Faciundum curavit. H. C. E. Hie conditus est. H. S. E. Hie situs est. Ob. Obiit. P. C. Poni cura7it V. Vixit 194 APPENDIX. 5. Miscellaneous. A. U. C. Anno Urbis Conditse. D. D. Dono dedit. D. D. D. Dat, dicat, dedicat. D. M. Diis Manibus. D. O. M. Deo Optimo Maximo. F. Filius. F. F. F. Felix, faustum, fortunatum. S. C. Senatus Consultum. S. D. Salutem dicit. S. P. D. Salutem plurimam dicit. S. V. B. E. E. Q. V. Si vales, bene est, ego quoque valeo. Tr. Pot. Tribunicia Potestate 6. Modern. A. B. Artium Baccalaureus. A. C. Anno Christi. A. D. Anno Domini. A. M. Artium Magister. Anno Mundi. i, C. n. ante Christum natum. p. C. n. post Christum natum. C P. P. C. Collatis pecuniis poni curaverunt. Cet. Cetera. Cf. Confer or Conferatur. Coll. Collato or Collatis. Cod. Codex. Codd. Codices. D. Doctor. Del. Dele or Deleatur. Ed. Editio. Edd. Editiones. Etc. Etcetera, h. e. hoc. est. I. C. Jesus Christus. Ictus. Jurisconsultus, i. e id est. i. q. idem quod. L. or Lib. Liber. L. B. Lectori benevolo. 1. c. loco citato. 1. 1. loco laudato. leg. lege or legatur. LL. D. Legum Doctor. M. D. Medicina? Doctor. N. B. Nota bene. N. T. Novum Testamentum. Obs Observa or observetur. P. S. Postscriptum. S. T. P. Sanetae Theologiae Pro- fessor. sc. scilicet, s. v. sub voce, vid. vide or videatur. viz. videlicet. V. Cel. Vir celebernmus. V. CI. Vir Clarissimus. V. TV Vetus Testamentum X. THE ROMAN CALENDAR. (a) The Roman Calendar agrees with the English, except in the manner of naming the days of the month. Every Roman month had three chief days; Calendar (Calends), Nona? (Nones), Idus (Ides.) The Calends were always the 1st day of the month : the Nones were on the 5th: the Ides on the 18th ; except in March, May, July, and October, in which month the Nones were on the 7th, the Ides on the 15th. . Martins, October, cum Maio Julius, exstant, Quindecima in queis Lux facit Idus, septima Nonas. These three days, the Calends, Nones, and Ides, were taken as points, from which the other days were counted backwards. That is, the Romans did ••>♦ 9(*y, such and such a day after., -Sec, but such and such, a day before the Calenas, or Nones, or Ides. APPENDIX. 195 N 1 | j 1 W 3 Martius, Maius 'Januaruts, Augus- Aprilis, Ilnius, Februarius, 28 o^i Julius, Octo- tus. December, | September, No- Days — in every g J BER, 31 D ays. | 31 Days. VEMBER, 30 Days. fourth Year 29. m 1 iCalendis 1 Calendis Calendis. -| >• Calendis. 2 ja.d. VI. 1 Ja.d.IV. T § a.d. IV. 1 9 T3 ad. IV. "| m 3 ja.d. V. 3 pUdd. in. \ § 5 a.d. III. j a.d. III. L g 4 la.d. IV. '§ $ Pridie J £ Pridie *m Pridie J © Nonis * 1 » ad. III. A Nonis Nonis a 6 Pridie J 2 a.d. VIII. 1 > a.d. VIII. "I a.d VIII. 1 *n 7 Nonis a.d. VII. t| a.d. VII. us a.d. VII. ' ?" 8 a.d. VIII. "1 > r ' a.d. VI. a.d. VI. H 3 a.d. VI. 9 a.d. VII. . a.d. V. ' 5 a.d. V. J «• a.d. V. Is 10 a.d. VI. c^ a.d. IV. 2 re a.d. IV. ' la.d. IV. i •= 11 a.d. V. a.d. III. a.d. III. 3 a.d. III. 12 a.d. IV. C B Pridie p Pridie. < Pridie j , 13 a.d. III. Idibus j Idibus . Idibus 14 Pridie f* a.d. XIX. I ' ad. XVIII.l " ad. XVI. " ' 15 I dibu s a.d. XVIII. a.d. XVII. g ad. XV. 16 a.d. XVII.l a.d. XVII ad. XVI. a.d. XIV. 17 a.d. XVI. a.d. XVI hq a.d. XV. a.d. XIII. 18 a.d. XV. > a.d. XV. • a.d. XIV. a.d. XII. 19 a.d. XIV. a.d. XIV ? a.d. XIII. i* a.d. XI. m 20 a.d. XIII. a.d. XIII a.d. XII. 9 z_ a.d. X. 21 a.d. XII. g a.d. XII 9 > 1 a.d. XI. "3 a.d. IX. >l 22 a.d. XI. 9 a.d. XI. ft a.d. X. L - > a.d. VIII. 3 r 23 a.d. X. . 9 a.d. X. a.d. IX. « q a.d VII. 24 a.d. IX. * ' > a.d. IX. 5 a.d. VIII. U n a.d. VI. 25 a.d. VIII. a.d. VIII. a.d. VII. a.d. V. 26 a.d. VII. a.d. VII. «-. a.d. VI. a.d. IV. 1 27 ad. VI. % a.d. VI. 5 a.d. V. M a.d. III. 28 a.d. V. a.d. V. a.d. IV. » Pridie 29 ad. IV. < a.d. IV. a.d. III. P 30 a.d. III. a.d. III. Pridie 31 Pridie Pridie [In Leap-year, Feb. 24th (a.d. VI. Cal. Mart.) was twice reckoned, — hence this day was called DIES BISSE.XTUS. and leap-year it- Self ANNUS BISSEX- TUS] f b) If we take the month of January as a sample, the first day was Calendcs Januarice. The 2d must be reckoned backwards from the Nones, which in January fell on the 5th, Nonce Januaricc. But in this reckoning the day of the Nones itself must be included. Therefore our 4th of January was the 2d day before the Nones, called pridie (ante) Notias Januarias. The 3d of January was tertio {.ante) Nonas Januarias ; the 2d, quarto {ante) Nonas Januarias ; or, abbreviated, III. Non. Jan., IV. Non. Jan. To obtain the Roman name for the 6th of January, we must begin to count backwards from the Ides, which fell on the 1 3th, Idus Jauuarice. Thus, the 1 2th was pridie Id. Jan. ; the Uth, III. Id. Jan.; the 10th, IV. Id. Jan. &c ; the 6th was therefore VIII. Id. Jan. To obtain the name for the 14th of January, we must, count back from the Calends of the next month, February, Cakndte Februaria. Thus, January 31st was pridie Cal. Feb. ,• January 30th, III. Cal. Feb. &c &c.; January 14th was, therefore, XIX. Cal. Feb. 196 APPENDIX. (c) From these observations it appears that we may find the Roman name for any given English day by the following rules : — (1) If the given day is between the Calends and Nones of the Roman month, subtract its English number from the English number of the day on which the Nones fall, increased by one: the remainder will give that number before the Nones by which the day is called in Latin. (2) Similarly, if the given day is between the Nones and Ides of the Roman month, subtract its English number from the English number of the day on which the Ides fall, increased by one : the remainder will give that number before the Ides by which the day is called in Latin. Thus, to find the Roman name for the 4th of June, the Nones of June falling on the 5th, subtract 4 from 5 + 1, or 6 ; the remainder Is 2 (pridie) ; therefore, the 4th of June is pridie Non. Jun. Again ; to find the Roman name for the 10th of May, the Ides of May falling on the 15th, subtract 10 from 15 + 1, or 16; the remainder being 6, the 10th of May is called VI. Id. Mai. (3) But, if the given day is between the Ides of the given month and the Calends of the next, then subtract its English number from the total number of days in the given month, increased by two ; the remainder will give that number before the Calends of the next month by which the day is called in Latin. Thus, to find the Roman name for the 18th of August: subtract 18 from 31 + 2, or 33, the remainder is 15, and August 18th is called XV. Cal. Sept. For April 21st, subtract 21 from 30 + 2, or 32, there remains 11; and April 21st is called XI. Cal. Mai. For February 25th, subtract 25 from 28+2, or 30, there remains 5; and February 25 th is called V. Cal. Mart. (rf) As regards Construction, Calendis, Nonis, Idikus are used as Abla- tives of time ; and when tertio, quarto, &c, Calendas, &c, are used, the words die ante are understood. But Cicero does not use these Matter phrases : he writes (for instance) ante diem tertium Calendar Jantt arias, or, abbreviated, a. d. II I. Cal. Jan. to express December 30th, and so in every case. Here the Preposition ante has, by a corruption of custom, quitted its proper place before Calendas, to stand before diem which it does not govern. So merely idiomatic is this mode of expression, that we find it used in dependence on Prepositions ; as Consul Latinas in ante diem tertium Idus Sextiles edixit. — Liv. De Quinto fiatre nuntii nobis tristes venerant ex ante diem Non. Jun. usque ad pridie Cal. Sept. — Cic. (e) The names of the months are Adjectives agreeing with mensis under- stood : Januarius, Februarius, Martins, Aprilis, Mains, Junius, Julius, (so called fiom Julius Csesar, but before his time Quintilis), Augustus (so called from Augustus Caesar, but before his time Sextilis), Sep- tember, October, November, December. With the words Calendas, Nonce, ldus, they are always used attributively, never as Possessive Genitives ; as, Natus est Augustus IX. Calendas Octobres. — Suet. Memoria te- nent, me a. d. XIII. Calendas Januarias principem revocandce liberVdh fuisse. — Cic. Capuam venire jussi sumus ad Nonas Februarias, — Cic VII. Idus Maias cestaiis initium. — CoLUM appendix:. 197 XL COMPOUND NUMERALS. s Sicilicus = \ — pes ^ Sescuncia or Sescunx = 1% uncia = £ quadrans = fa As. StsquiaUera ratio = 1 : 1^ = 2 : 3. Of the divisions of the As, the uncia, sextans, quadrans, triens, quincunx, semis, were represented by copper coins. b. As was the Roman unit, and was used for any whole divided into 12 equal parts; which parts were called uncice. Hence it was applied to measure length, capacity, &c, as well as weight : and " inch," or the 12th part of a foot, as well as " ounce," the 12th part of a lb., is derived from uncia. It was also used to calculate interest. Thus (interest being paid monthly at the rate of so much per 100 Asses): Uncice usurce = T ^ per cent per month = 1 per cent per annum. Sextantes = J — — =2 Quadrantes = \ — — = S &c. &c. &c. Asses usurai = I per cent per month = 12 per cent per annum. Asses usura were also called centesimce ; and bince centesimal = 2 per cent per month = 24 per cent; so quaterna centesimas = 48 per cent per annum. Horace says : Quinas hie capiti mercedes exsecat (i. e. quinas centesimas). (This man slices off 60 per cent from the capital ; i. e. in lending a sum of money he deducts from it interest at the rate of 5 per cent per month = 60 per cent per annum.) The meaning of unciarium foenus, which was the yearly interest legalised by the Twelve Tables, has been disputed. In the Dictionary of Greek and Roman An- tiquities, it is understood to mean 1 uncia per as m 8J per cent per irnium. c. Here* ex asse means heir to the whole estate. Herts ex dvunce — heir to \\ of the estate. Heres ex semisse, or j _ heir tQ . rf thp ^^ Heres ex di\ mdia parte J ■ &c. && APPENDIX. 199 d. Fractions might also be expressed by the Ordinals as Denominators and the Cardinals for Numerators (above 1). Thus, £ is dimidia pars . \ tertia pars, &c. ; | sexta pars or dimidia tertia ( ; ) x J) ; \ octava pars 01 dimidia quarta (\ x \), &c. So ^ was tertia septima (3 x j). Again, § is either duce tertia, or duce partes, or dimidia et sexta (} + b = §)' And J is tres quartce, or ires partes, or dimidia et quarta Q + £ = ^). e. The Sestertius (Nummus), or sesterce, was a silver coin equal to 2$ asses, and | of the deiiarius. Some derive its symbol HS from IIS (2 J), others from LLS (Libra Libra semis'), which comes to the same thing. The Sestertium ( = 1000 sestertii) was not a coin, but a sum, and is only used in the Plural Number. Some suppose that the Substantive joined with the Numeral Adverbs decies, vicies, &c, is a Neuter Noun Sestertium, only used in the Singular, and signifying 100,000 sesterces. Be this correct or not, the practical rule for the student's guidance is as follows : — (1) Sestertius, or Sestertii (Plur.) (often expressed by HS.) joined with the Cardinal or Distributive Numbers, denotes so many nummi ses- tertii (coins cal'ed sesterces) as in the examples cited § 172. (6). (2) Sestertia, in the Plural (also often represented by HS.) joined with the Cardinal or Distributive Numbers, denotes so many 1000 nummi sestertii : as, in the examples cited (c). (3) The Numeral Adverbs, joined with (or understanding) sestertii (Gen. sing.), sestertium, nummum, or HS., denote so many 100,000 nummi sestertii, as in the examples to Obs. When an amount, is described by more than one of these Adverbs, they must be added together if the larger Numeral stands first, but multiplied when the smaller is first ; care being taken not to reckon the centena millia, which is under- stood, more than once in the whole amount. Thus, mil/ies quingentie* = 150,000,000 sesterces ; but qnaterdecies millies = 1 ,400,000,000 sesterces. When the numbers are in cipher, it is often difficult to know whether sestertii or sestertia are meant. A distinction is sometimes made by a line over the Numeral. Thus, HS.X = Sestertii decern. H S. X = Sestertia decern, H S. X = Sestertii decies. Wurm gives the following rule : — When the Numbers are divided into three classes by points, the right-hand division indicates units, the second thousands, the left-hand hundreds of thousands. Thus, III. XII. DC =5300,000+ 12,000 + 600 = 312,600 sesterces- But these distinctions are not strictly observed in manuscripts. XIII. METRES. A. List of Feet. (a) Of two Syllables — v.^ Pyrrhichius : pat£r. I -w Trochaeus : ailrilf* v* Iambus: dmdnt. I — Spond«us: lat&$, 200 APPENDIX. \0) Of three syllables — * Creticus : dixSrnnt, - Bacchius : regSbdnt. «-» Antibacchius : rexusi. - Molossus: dicebds. w *4 *» Tribrachys . rSgttrti. * ^ ^ Dactyl us : cdrpdrd. v w - Anapaestus : animds. w-^ Amphibrachys: latlnus. (c) Of four syllables — */ v-» w v Proceleusmaticus : hominibus, -\j\j sj Paeon Primus : cbndidimus. k/ - w» yj Pa?on Secundus : dmdbimus. w w/ - v> Paeon Tertius : nemdrdlts. v \j \j - Paeon Quartus : regimini. \j \j — — Ionicus a Minore : metuentes. — - vv Ionicus a Majore : terrebimiis, w — w — Diiambus : protervitas. — ^ - o Ditrochaeus : cfindidlsse, — v v " Choriambus : uppdsitls. v — ^ Antispastus : regebdmur. V Epitritus Primus : dmdvlsti. — vy — Epitritus Secundus : audiebds, — - v - Epitritus Tertius : dudlverdnt. w» Epitritus Quartus : rexissemus. Dispondeus : suspexerdnt. The Trochee is also called Choreus, the Cretic Amphimacer B. Arsis. As Arsis properly falls on a long syllable, in Iambic Metre it will fall on the second syllables of the feet, in Dactylic and Trochaic on the first. When a long syllable having Arsis is resolved into two short ones, the Arsis falls on the first of these; hence, when a Tribrach is put for an Iambus, the Arsis is on its second syllable ; when for a Trochee, on its first. Caesura after Arsis is called strong ,- after Thesis weak. C. Metrical Terms. Two feet (Dipodia) make a metre in Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic Verses, one foot in Dactylic and other Measures. A Verse of one Metre is called Monometer, — two — Dimeter, — three — Trimeter. — four — Tetrameter, — five — Pentameter, — six — Hexameter. &c. Two feet and a syllable in Dactylic, Iambic, and Trochaic Verses are called Penthemimeris, a Penthemimer : as, Arboribusque comes. — Beatus tile. — Truditur dies. Three feet and a syllable are called Hephtliemimeris, a Hephthemimer : as, Quid faciat latas segetes. — Locas sub ipsum funus.— Truditur dies die. So Trihemimeris, one foot and a syllable ; Ennehemi- rneris, four feet and a syllable. Anacrusis is a syllable in Thesis at the be- ginning of certain kinds of verse. A Base is a Trochee (or Spondee with Arsis on the first syllable) at the beginning of certain verses. APPENDIX. 201 D. Dactylic Hexameter. a. The Dactylic Hexameter is also called Senarius from having sil feet ( sent pedes) and Heroicus, because the deeds of Heroes were celebrated in this measure by the oldest poets, Homer, Hesiod, &c, and afterwards by their Latin imitators Ennius, Virgil, &c. b. When a Spondee occurs in the 5th place (which is a rare licence, and seldom to be imitated) a Dactyl generally precedes it : as, Cara deum soboles, magnum Jovis incrementum. — Virg. But not always : as, Cum patribus populoque, Penatibus et magnis DU. e. Such lines as these, being without Caesura, are bad and inadmissible t Hastis campus longis circum splendet et horret. Lumina dilabentem coelo ducitis annum. Efficientia cernite dissociabile marmor. d. The following rules are also to be borne in mind by the young com- poser of Heroic Hexameters : — ( 1 ) A Spondaic word, followed by a stop, and belonging in sense to the preceding verse, seldom begins an Hexameter : as, Spiramenta linunt, fucoque etjloribus oras Explent, | collectumque haic ipsa ad munera gluten. — Viae This may, however, be done for the sake of emphasis : as, Extinctum Nymphce crudeli funere Daphnin Flebant: \ vos coryli testes et fiumina Nymphis. — Virg. (2) Dialysis after the 2d foot is very rare, and to be avoided : as, Scilicet omnibus \ est labor impendendus, et omnes. — Virg. Unless the 2d foot ends with a monosyllable or a pyrrhich : as, Experiar, tu | deinde jubeto certet Amyntas. — Virg. Ecce duas tibU \ Daphni, duas altaria Phcebo. — Virg. The only common exception to this rule is when inter or intra forms the 2d foot, followed by a monosyllabic pronoun : as, Talibus inter se dictis ad tecta subibant. — Virg. If an elided syllable follows the 2d foot, it is commonly followed by a monosyllabic particle : as, Turn durare solum \\ et discludere Nerea ponto.—VlRQ» But not always, as, Quin etiam patrid || excussos infesta per undas. — Virg. (3) Verses with only weak Caesuras in the first four feet are rare, but when occasionally introduced they contribute to the melody of the versification : as, Dicemus, Daphninque twim tollemus ad astra. Daphnin || ad astra \\feremus 9 || amavit nos quoque Daphnis. — Virg. 202 APPENDIX. (4) The 3d foot may not consist of a single word. Such verses as tha following art therefore bad : Et liquidi simul ignes, his exordia primis. Non aliter quam fervida qui freta remige findit. The following exception occurs in Virgil : Summa leves hinc nescio qua dulcedine lata. But nescio quis was considered as equivalent to a single word, (5) Verses without Caesura in the 3d foot are comparatively rare : as, Eumenides, quibus anguineo redimita capillo. — Catull. (6) A Verse, which has the strong Hephthemimeral Caesura without the strong Penthemimeral, generally has the strong Trihemimeral : as, Non unquam || gravis cere domum || mihi dextra redibat. — Virg. rarely the weak Trihemimeral without a Penthemimeral : as, Degeneremque || Neoptolemum || narrare memento. — Virg. rarely the weak Penthemimeral without a Trihemimeral : as, Orphei Calliopea || Lino || formosus Apollo. — Virg. Armentarius Afer || agit || tectumque Laremque. — Virg. rarely the two weak Caesuras together ; as, Una Eurusque || Notusque || ruunt, || creberque procellis. — Virg, (7) Dialysis with stop after the 3d foot is rare, and to be very sparingly introduced : as, Montibus audiri fragor : | et resonantia longd. — Virg. (8) The strong Ennehemimeral Caesura (after the first syllable of the 5th foot) is rare and harsh : as, Nee saturare Jimo pingui pudeat || sola, neve. — Virg. When the verse ends with a quadrisyllable word, forming an Ionic a Minore, this Caesura is unavoidable : as, Per connubia nostra, per inceptos \\ hymenceos. — Virg. (9) Verses, in which the latter half makes a double rhyme to the former, should be avoided : as, Trajicit : i t verbis virtntem illude superbis. — Virg. (10) The sound and rhythm of Verses may often be suited to the sense; thus Virgil uses Spondees to express slowness and difficulty ; Dae* tyls to mark rapidity and ease : as, (a) Tlli inter sese magna vi brachia tollunt. — Virg. Ter sunt conati imponere Pelio Ossan Scilicet, atque Ossie frondosum involvere Olympum. — Vino. (&) Quadrupedante putrem sonitu quatit ungula campum. — ViivO. Sedfugit interea, fugit irrepn rabile tempus. — Virg. jAibitvr et labetur in omne volubilis cecum. — Hor. APPENDIX. 203 A final Monosyllable often expresses ponderousness : as, Sternitur exanimisqae tremens procumbit humi bos. — Vibg. Crowded Elisions, especially Ecthlipses, give a harsh and rugged sound to a Verse, and are sometimes used where the idea conveyed is of that character : as in the well-known description of the Cyclops : Monstrum horrendum, informe, tngens, cui lumen ademptum.— Virg. Both the pauses, Caesura, and Dialysis, are often accommodated to the sense with great effect and beauty. E. Dactylic Pentameter. a. A trisyllabic word at the end of the Pentameter is ungraceful, and to be avoided, though sometimes found : as, Abdita quce senis fata canit pedibus. — Tibull. A quadrisyllable or quinquesyllabic termination is not sc ungraceful as the trisyllabic, but it occurs seldom in Ovid, and is not generally proper for imitation : as, Maxima de nihilo nascitur historia. — Propebt. Lis est cum forma magna pudicitice. — Ov. b. The following additional rules for the Pentameter will be found ire- ful by the young composer : — (1 ) The first Penthemimer seldom ends with an Iambic word ; but when it does, the 1st foot is usually a Spondee: as, Pascebatque suas ipse senator oves. — Ov. But not always : as, Si tibi cura mei 9 sit tibi cura tut. — Ov. (2) The first Penthemimer seldom begins with a spondaic word ; seldom contains two spondees; and begins more frequently with a dactyl than with a spondee. (3) Elisions in the second Penthemimer are inelegant : before the final disyllable an elision, such as in the following verse, is to be entirely avoided : Quis scit an hcec scevas t/gridas insula habet? — Ov. (4) The final disyllabic word should be either a verb, a substantive, or a pronoun (personal or possessive). An adverb is seldom placed there ; an adjective or participle very seldom, unless as a predicate or with a strong emphasis : as, Hoc faciet positce te mihi, terra, levem. — Ov. (5) The verse seldom ends with a short vowel : as, Qualiter abjectd de nive manat aqua. — Ov 204 APPENDIX. (6) The Penthemimers may end with words that rhyme singly : as, Hue ades, et nitidas casside solve comas. — Ov. But the double or Leonine rhyme is to be avoided : as, Qucerebant fiavos per nemus omne favos. — Ov. (7) The word preceding the final disy liable should not be a monosyllable F. The Elegiac Distich. a. Sentences are not often carried on from one distich to another at all : but when they are, there should be some kind of pause in the sense. Attributives are not to be so separated from the words which they qualify ; but verbs and other predicates are occasionally so divided from their subjects. As, Languor et immodici nullo sub vindice somni, Aleaque, et multo temporu quassa mero, Eripiunt omnes animo sine vulnere nervos : Adjluit incautis insidiosu* amor. — Ov. b. The following additional Rules for the Elegiac Distich may also be useful : — (1) The Elegiac Hexameter is much more restricted in its rhythms than the Heroic. One of the Caesuras, strong or weak, in the 3d foot, is almost always present : almost always, too, either the strong Penthemimeral or the strong Hephthemimeral Ceesura. A Dia- lysis at the end of the 2d foot, after a word of more than two times, is bad. Ennehemimeral Caesuras (except after a mono- syllable), spondees in the fifth place, terminations by a word of more than three syllables, &c, must be avoided. (2) A pause in the sense is found, oftener than not, at the close of the Hexameter. Ovid very seldom intermixes the sense from the be- ginning to the end of a distich : and when he does so, he takes care to make the arrangement of words as neat and perspicuous as pos- sible : as, Roma, nisi immevsum vires promdsset in orbem, Stramineis esset nunc quoque densa casis. — Ov. (S) If the sense is carried on to the first word of the Pentameter, after which is a pause, that word is usually a dactyl, often a trochee, seldom a spondee or molossus, more rarely yet a choriambus. (4) Elisions should be sparingly and never harshly used. It has been observed that in the first 1000 lines of the Fasti there are cut off only 4 final syllables in m, 7 long, and 39 short vowels, making a total of 50, or an average of only one elision in 20 lines. And of these 33 are before the word est. APPENDIX. 205 G. Otheu Metres used by Poets of the Augustan Age. I SINGLE VERSES. f Metres consisting of one sort of Rhythm (as the Heroic) are called Monocola.) a. Dactylic Rhythms. (1) Dimeter Hypercatalecticus (Penthemimcr^ Archilochius Minor consisting of two Dactyls and a syllable ; 1 2 •- \«» w I — V^ S^ I "■ j4rbori\busqve co\m APPENDIX. 2] i The Trochaic Verse admits only Trochees. The Iambic has no Dactyls or Anapaests; and always has the Penthemimeial Casura. (2) Metrum Iambicum Senarium Quaternarium. Iambic. Trim. Acat. + Iambic. Dim. Acat. Beatus ille qui procul negotiis, Ut prisca gens mortalium. — Hon. Epod. 2. (3) Metrum Archilochium Primum. Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Dactyl. Archilochius Minor. Diffugere nives ; redennt jam gramina campis, Arboribusque comet. — Hor. Od. 4, 7. (4) Metrum Archilochium Secundum. Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Iambelegus Archilochius. Horrida tempestas ccdvm contraxit, et imbres Nivesque deducunt Jovem ; nunc mare nunc silueB. — Hor. Epod. 19 (5) Metrum Archilochium Tertium. Iambic. Trim. Acat. + Elegiambus Archilochius. Petti, nihil me 9 sicut antea,juvat Scribere versiculos Amove percussum gravi. — Hor. Epod. 1 S . (6) Metrum Archilochium Quartum. Logaa&dicus Archilochius Major + Iamb. Trim. Cat. Solvitur acris hyems grata vice verts et Favoni y Trahuntque siccas machince carinas. — Hor. Od. 1, 4. The Iambic line always has a Spondee in the third place, and admitf no trisyllabic feet. (7) Metrum Pythiambicum Primum. Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Iamb. Dim. Acat. Mollis inertia cur tantam diffuderit imis OMivionem sensibus. — Hor. Epod. 14. (8) Metrum Pythiambicum Secundum. Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Hexapodia Iambica. Altera jam teritur bellis civilibus et jp a» with an elision : as, Cuntftore Mcceexao rosarium, et. — Boa. Insuds diffingas retusum in. — Hoiu ^S) Hypermeters occur only twice in Horace- as. Sors exitura y et nos in ceter\nttm Ex ilium impositura eymb. — Modern scholars have observed that most of Horace's Odes m Metra M'onocola or Dicola contain as many lines as form some multiple of 4. This has justly led them to regard such Metres as Tetcastrophic r and as such they are printed by Orelli, Dillenburger, &c Such are Carm. 1. 1. 3. 4. 8. 11. &c. Nots 2. — A careful examination of the Odes of Horace, especially oi those in the 3rd and 4th books, his last and most finished works y will show that this poet earefully regarded the metrical relation of one verse to another, especially in the same strophe : that a verse ending with a vowel ©r m before another beginning with a vowel rarely occurs, Such juxta- positions as the following are therefore ratlier to be avoided than imitated^ Neve te nostris vitiis inicpuvm> (Jcior aura. Fitts reeantatis amkn ij-pprr.briisy animumque tedd®3* THE END Spottisvcood'e & Co* Prin ters* New -street Square^ London* L/P ■ university ^Lcaufo* RETURN TO the circulation desk ot any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS • 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 • 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF • Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date. DUE AS STAMPED BELOW .ii in 04 1997 12,000(11/95) U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES co^^eemtm